WO2024012281A1 - Carrier switching method and apparatus - Google Patents

Carrier switching method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024012281A1
WO2024012281A1 PCT/CN2023/105089 CN2023105089W WO2024012281A1 WO 2024012281 A1 WO2024012281 A1 WO 2024012281A1 CN 2023105089 W CN2023105089 W CN 2023105089W WO 2024012281 A1 WO2024012281 A1 WO 2024012281A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
carrier
switching
message
smallest
terminal device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/105089
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张莉莉
丁梦颖
戴喜增
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024012281A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024012281A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/004Synchronisation arrangements compensating for timing error of reception due to propagation delay
    • H04W56/0045Synchronisation arrangements compensating for timing error of reception due to propagation delay compensating for timing error by altering transmission time
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a carrier switching method and device.
  • the uplink transmission of terminal equipment usually results in insufficient uplink coverage of base stations due to power limitations and insufficient uplink (UL) spectrum.
  • the NR system introduces supplementary uplink (SUL) technology, which combines the lower frequency bands of the long term evolution (LTE) system (such as 700 MHz (MHz), 800 MHz, 1.8 GHz ( GHz), or 2.1GHz, etc.) is used for NR uplink transmission, which can improve the uplink coverage of the base station.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • GHz 1.8 GHz
  • 2.1GHz 2.4 GHz
  • the terminal device when the terminal device transmits UL data in the frequency band of the NR system (such as 2.6GHz, etc.), the terminal device can use the carrier to transmit the UL data in these lower frequency bands of the LTE system according to the channel status, etc., which requires the terminal device to Dynamic switching between two carriers. For example, the terminal device can switch from a 2.6GHz carrier to a 1.8GHz carrier.
  • terminal equipment can support parallel transmission of two or more radio frequency links, which means that terminal equipment can operate on three or more Carrier switching between carriers.
  • the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1.
  • the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3.
  • the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3.
  • the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 1.
  • the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 4.
  • the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a carrier switching method and device to implement carrier switching of a terminal device between three carriers or four carriers.
  • the present application provides a carrier switching method, which can be executed by a terminal device or by a component of the terminal device.
  • a first message is received from a network device, and according to the first message , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal
  • the device switches from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum time advance TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a first identifier, and the first identifier is one of the second carrier sets.
  • the identification of the TA corresponding to the carrier or, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes the first carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to obtain the information from the first carrier.
  • the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, where the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
  • the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is one in the first carrier set.
  • the identifier of the TA corresponding to the carrier, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; wherein the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  • the terminal device receives the first message from the network device, and switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the instruction content of the first message, thereby realizing the terminal device operating on three carriers or four carriers. switching between carriers. Furthermore, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set through TA related information.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier in the set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA; the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or switching to the second carrier set. third carrier.
  • the terminal device can determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier or to the frequency of the third carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, and can adjust the frequency from The state of data transmission on the first carrier is switched to the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier, so that the terminal device can perform parallel transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier, thereby improving data transmission efficiency.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is first value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates
  • the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set.
  • the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
  • the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers
  • the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers
  • the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the terminal device can determine the carrier that is interrupted during switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, and the duration of the interruption of the carrier.
  • the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be the first identifier.
  • the first carrier is switched to the third carrier; or the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier or to the frequency of the third carrier according to the TA identifier carried in the first message.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier; , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the second carrier to the frequency of the first carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, or determine to adjust the radio frequency link applied to the third carrier.
  • the frequency corresponding to the channel is adjusted to the frequency of the first carrier, which can switch from the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier to the state of data transmission through the first carrier, which can reduce the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set.
  • a carrier the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, the method further includes: determining the The first switching interval is a first value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching.
  • the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value. The difference from the second value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set
  • the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set
  • the method further includes: determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be the difference between the first value and the second value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier switching
  • the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
  • the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers
  • the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers
  • the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the terminal device can determine the carrier that is interrupted during the switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier and the duration of the interruption of the carrier according to the instruction content of the first message.
  • the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the third carrier is switched to the first carrier; or the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the second carrier is switched to the first carrier.
  • the terminal device can determine, based on the TA identification carried in the first message, to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the second carrier to the frequency of the first carrier or to adjust the radio frequency applied to the third carrier.
  • the frequency corresponding to the link is adjusted to the frequency of the first carrier.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the corresponding carrier; the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  • the terminal device can determine, according to the instruction content of the first message, to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier, and to adjust the radio frequency link applied to the fourth carrier. Adjust the corresponding frequency to the frequency of the third carrier, or determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the third carrier, and adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the fourth carrier to The frequency of the second carrier can be switched from a state of data transmission through the first carrier and a fourth carrier to a state of data transmission through the second carrier and a third carrier.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the third On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in a carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval to be the sum of the first value and the The difference between the second values;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value. and the third switching interval is the first value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval except The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the first portion being the second value and the remaining portion being the first value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval
  • the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the method further includes: determining the first part as a second value, and the remaining part as a first value , and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
  • the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier
  • the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier.
  • the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, or to switch from the first carrier to the third carrier and from The carrier that was interrupted when the fourth carrier was switched to the second carrier, and the length of time that the carrier was interrupted.
  • the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be:
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier;
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier.
  • the carrier is switched to the third carrier
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  • the carrier is switched to the third carrier
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and from the first The carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  • the terminal device can determine, based on the TA identification carried in the first message, to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier and to adjust the radio frequency link of the fourth carrier.
  • the corresponding frequency is adjusted to the frequency of the third carrier
  • the corresponding frequency of the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier is adjusted to the frequency of the third carrier
  • the corresponding frequency of the radio frequency link applied to the fourth carrier is adjusted to the frequency of the second carrier .
  • the method may further include: sending a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
  • the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
  • the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
  • the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
  • the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
  • the terminal device can report its own capability information to the network device, so that the network device can instruct the terminal device to perform handover between three carriers or perform handover between four carriers based on the capability information.
  • the method may further include: receiving the first TA and the second TA from the network device.
  • this application provides a carrier switching method, which can be executed by a terminal device or by a component of the terminal device.
  • the method includes: sending a second message to the network device, the second message including one or more of the following information:
  • the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
  • the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
  • the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
  • the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
  • the method may further include: receiving a first message from the network device, and switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message; wherein the first A carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates a minimum time for the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the advance TA or the maximum TA and/or includes a first identifier, which is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier , and/or includes a second identifier, the second identifier being an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or, the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, and the third carrier
  • the two carrier sets include a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the first carrier set to the smallest TA or the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, the third identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, and the fourth identifier is the second carrier
  • the first carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the second carrier corresponds to the second TA
  • the third carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set; according to the first message , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is first value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates
  • the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set.
  • the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
  • the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers
  • the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers
  • the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be the first identifier.
  • the first carrier is switched to the third carrier; or the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier; , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set.
  • a carrier the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, the method further includes: determining the The first switching interval is a first value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching.
  • the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value. The difference from the second value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set
  • the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set
  • the method further includes: determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be the difference between the first value and the second value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier switching
  • the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
  • the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers
  • the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers
  • the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the third carrier is switched to the first carrier; or the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the second carrier is switched to the first carrier.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • Corresponding carrier corresponds to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier set. carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value. and the third switching interval is the first value;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval except The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the first portion being the second value and the remaining portion being the first value;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval
  • the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the method further includes: determining the first part as a second value, and the remaining part as a first value , and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
  • the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier
  • the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier.
  • the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier.
  • the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be:
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier;
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier.
  • the carrier is switched to the third carrier
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  • the carrier is switched to the third carrier
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and from the first The carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  • the method may further include: receiving the first TA and the second TA from the network device.
  • the present application provides a carrier switching method, which can be executed by a network device or by a component of the network device.
  • the method includes: configuring a first TA and a second TA for a terminal device, and sending a first message to the terminal device; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, and the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a first identifier, and the third carrier
  • An identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
  • the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier
  • the second carrier set includes a first carrier
  • the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA or a maximum TA from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the TA is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, where the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set;
  • the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier
  • the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier
  • the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a carrier from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the carrier in the first carrier set.
  • the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier in the second carrier set;
  • the first carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the second carrier corresponds to the second TA
  • the third carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates
  • the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set. on the corresponding carrier;
  • the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
  • the first identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set.
  • a carrier the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set
  • the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects the highest value from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the small TA is switched to the first carrier, the first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the first The remainder of the switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after carrier switching;
  • the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  • the second identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier.
  • the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the set, and/or instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also Indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval except The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval
  • the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set
  • the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on the carrier
  • the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier
  • the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier.
  • the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
  • the third identification is the identification of the first TA
  • the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA
  • the third identification is the identification of the second TA.
  • the identifier of the TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or,
  • the third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
  • the method may further include: receiving a second message from the terminal device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
  • the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
  • the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
  • the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
  • the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
  • sending the first message to the terminal device may be sending the first message to the terminal device according to the second message.
  • configuring the first time advance TA and the second TA for the terminal device may include: sending the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the present application provides a carrier switching method, which may be executed by a network device or by a component of the network device.
  • the method includes: receiving a second message from the terminal device, the second message including one or more of the following information:
  • the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
  • the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
  • the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
  • the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
  • the method may further include: configuring a first time advance and TA and a second TA for the terminal device, and sending a first message to the terminal device; wherein the first carrier The set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates a minimum time advance for the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier set.
  • the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier
  • the second carrier set includes a first carrier
  • the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA or a maximum TA from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the TA is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, where the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set;
  • the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier
  • the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier
  • the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a carrier from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the carrier in the first carrier set.
  • the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier in the second carrier set;
  • the first carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the second carrier corresponds to the second TA
  • the third carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the third carrier.
  • the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set. on the corresponding carrier;
  • the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
  • the first identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set.
  • a carrier the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set
  • the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier
  • the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier switching on the subsequent carrier;
  • the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  • the second identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier.
  • the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the set, and/or instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also Indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates
  • the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set
  • the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set
  • the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the remaining part of the three handover intervals except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set;
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • carrier and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval
  • the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set
  • the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on the carrier
  • the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier
  • the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier.
  • the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
  • the third identification is the identification of the first TA
  • the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA
  • the third identification is the identification of the second TA.
  • the identifier of the TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or,
  • the third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
  • sending the first message to the terminal device may be sending the first message to the terminal device according to the second message.
  • configuring the first time advance TA and the second TA for the terminal device may include: sending the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device is used to perform the method described in the above-mentioned first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or is used to perform the method described in the above-mentioned second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. method described.
  • the communication device is, for example, a terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit).
  • the transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function.
  • the transceiver module When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the receiving module). receiving unit).
  • the sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device is used to perform the method described in the above third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or is used to perform the method described in the above fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect. method described.
  • the communication device is, for example, a network device, or a functional module in the network device, such as a baseband device or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit).
  • the transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function.
  • the transceiver module When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the receiving module). receiving unit).
  • the sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communications device may include one or more processors.
  • the communication device may also include a memory.
  • the memory is used to store one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the one or more processors are configured to execute the one or more computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the first aspect and any of the possible implementations of the first aspect. The method described above, or perform the method described in the above second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communications device may include one or more processors.
  • the communication device may also include a memory.
  • the memory is used to store one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the one or more processors are configured to execute the one or more computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the above third The method described in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect and the third aspect, or perform the method described in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect and the fourth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store computer programs or instructions that, when executed, make any one of the above-mentioned aspects possible.
  • the method described in the implementation mode is realized; or the method described in the implementation mode making any one of the above second aspect and the second aspect possible is realized; or making any one of the above third aspect and the third aspect possible.
  • the method described in the implementation manner is implemented; or the method described in the above fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect is implemented.
  • the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a computer, enable the method described in the above first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect to be implemented; or enable The method described in the above second aspect and any possible implementation of the second aspect is implemented; or the method described in the above third aspect and any possible implementation of the third aspect is implemented; or so that The method described in the above fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect is implemented.
  • the present application also provides a chip, which is coupled to a memory and used to read and execute program instructions in the memory, so that the device where the chip is located realizes the above first aspect and the first aspect.
  • the method described in any possible implementation manner; or in such a way that the device where the chip is located implements the above second aspect and the method described in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect; or in such a way that the chip is located in The device implements the method described in any one of the above third aspect and the possible implementation manner of the third aspect; or the device where the chip is located implements the method described in any one of the above fourth aspect and the possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • the present application further provides a communication system, including the communication device described in the fifth aspect, and/or the communication device described in the sixth aspect.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2A is a schematic diagram of base station 1 and base station 2 sharing the same site in the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 2B is a schematic diagram of the different site addresses of base station 1 and base station 2 in the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 4 to 28 are schematic diagrams of carrier switching provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • Figure 29 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 30 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Timing advance which can include uplink TA, downlink TA, or uplink TA and downlink TA.
  • the uplink TA is used for uplink transmission.
  • the radio frequency transmission delay caused by the distance between the terminal equipment and the base station is estimated and the uplink data is sent in advance accordingly. Bag.
  • the downlink TA is used for downlink transmission.
  • the radio frequency transmission delay caused by the distance between the terminal equipment and the base station is estimated, and the corresponding time is provided to send the downlink data. Bag.
  • Timing advance group including one or more serving cells, and a TAG has the same TA.
  • Switch gap also known as interruption time, interruption time, etc.
  • the switching interval is configured on the carrier, or it can be said that the switching interval is located on the carrier, etc. This is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the following takes the handover interval configured on the carrier as an example.
  • the carrier is configured with a switching interval, it means that the terminal device cannot receive signals through the carrier during the switching interval, nor can it send signals through the carrier.
  • the terminal device switches from carrier 1 to carrier 2, and the switching interval is configured on carrier 1, then the terminal device switches during the switching interval. The device cannot receive signals through this carrier 1, nor can it send signals through this carrier 1.
  • the terminal device switches from carrier 1 to carrier 2, and the switching interval is configured on carrier 2, then the terminal device cannot receive signals through carrier 2 during the switching interval, nor can it send signals through carrier 2.
  • the terminal equipment switches from carrier 1 to carrier 2, a part of the switching interval is configured on carrier 1, and the remaining part of the switching interval except this part is configured on carrier 2, then the terminal device within this part The device cannot receive a signal over carrier 1, nor over carrier 1, and the terminal device cannot receive a signal over carrier 2, nor over carrier 2, within this remainder.
  • radio frequency adjustment RF tuning
  • radio frequency re-adjustment RF retuning
  • the first value (can be recorded as switch period) involved in the embodiment of this application can be understood as a fixed value, which is the time period for the terminal device to adjust the radio frequency link between two carriers, for example, two corresponding TAs corresponding to the same TA. Adjust the duration of the RF link between carriers.
  • the first value may be a predefined fixed value, or may be a fixed value determined by the network device, or may be a fixed value determined by the terminal device, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the first value may be a fixed value determined by the network device based on the capability information of the terminal device and sent to the terminal device.
  • the first value may be a fixed value determined by the terminal device based on its own capability information and sent to the network device.
  • the third value involved in the embodiment of this application can be understood as the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal equipment, or it can also be understood as the time required for the terminal equipment to switch between two frequency bands. Duration, or can also be understood as the time required for a terminal device to switch from one frequency band that supports one or more radio frequency links to another frequency band that supports one or more radio frequency links.
  • the third value may be determined by hardware conditions of the terminal device, etc.
  • the third value may be, for example, 35 microseconds (us), 140us, 210us, or 280us, etc.
  • the third value in the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. It should be understood that the number of the third value may be one or multiple.
  • the terminal device may determine the first value based on the third value. For example, there are multiple third values, and the terminal device may determine one of the third values as the first value from the multiple third values. For another example, the third value is one, and the terminal device may determine that the third value is the first value.
  • the terminal device can send the third value to the network device as its own capability information, such as through radio resource control (RRC) signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the network device may determine the first value according to the third value, and send the first value to the terminal device. For example, there are multiple third values, and the network device may determine one of the third values as the first value from the multiple third values. For another example, the third value is one, and the network device may determine that the third value is the first value.
  • “plurality” means two or more.
  • “plurality” in the embodiments of this application can also be understood as “at least two”.
  • “At least one” can be understood as one or more, for example, one, two or more.
  • including at least one means including one, two or more, and it does not limit which ones are included.
  • it includes at least one of A, B and C, then it can include A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C.
  • “And/or” describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships.
  • a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first" and "second” mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
  • first carrier, the second carrier, the third carrier and the fourth carrier involved in the embodiment of the present application are used to distinguish multiple carriers and do not limit the priority or importance of the multiple carriers.
  • first TA and the second TA involved in the embodiment of this application are used to distinguish multiple TAs and do not limit the size, priority or importance of the multiple TAs.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication system
  • new radio new radio, NR
  • FIG 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 1000 includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200.
  • the communication system 1000 may also include the Internet 300.
  • the wireless access network 100 may include at least one network device, such as 110a and 110b in Figure 1, and may also include at least one terminal device, such as 120a-120j in Figure 1.
  • 110a is a base station
  • 110b is a micro station
  • 120a, 120e, 120f and 120j are mobile phones
  • 120b is a car
  • 120c is a gas pump
  • 120d is a home access point (HAP) arranged indoors or outdoors.
  • HAP home access point
  • the mobile phones in Figure 1 include 120a, 120e, 120f and 120j.
  • Mobile phone 120a can access the base station 110a, connect to the car 120b, directly communicate with the mobile phone 120e and access the HAP.
  • the mobile phone 120b can access the HAP and communicate with the mobile phone 120a.
  • mobile phone 120f can be connected as micro station 110b, connected to laptop 120g, connected to printer 120h, and mobile phone 120j can control drone 120i.
  • Network equipment is a network-side device with wireless transceiver functions.
  • the network equipment can be a device in the radio access network (RAN) that provides wireless communication functions for terminal equipment, which is called RAN equipment.
  • the wireless access network equipment may be a base station (base station), an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system
  • base station next generation base station
  • 6th generation, 6G the base station in the sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) mobile communication system, the base station in the future mobile communication system or the access node in the WiFi system, etc.
  • Modules or units with some functions of the base station for example, can be a centralized unit (CU) or a distributed unit (DU).
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • the CU here completes the functions of the base station's radio resource control protocol and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), and can also complete the functions of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP); DU completes the functions of the base station
  • the functions of the wireless link control layer and medium access control (MAC) layer can also complete some or all of the physical layer functions.
  • the network device may be a macro base station (110a in Figure 1), a micro base station or an indoor station (110b in Figure 1), a high-frequency base station, a relay node or a donor node, etc.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the network equipment.
  • the terminal device is a user-side device with wireless transceiver function.
  • Terminal equipment can also be called terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile station, mobile terminal, etc.
  • Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle to everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), and the Internet of Things (internet of things, IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
  • Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver functions, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, etc.
  • the device used to realize the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or may be a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system or a combined device or component that can realize the function of the terminal device.
  • the device Can be installed in terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the terminal equipment.
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment can be fixed-location or removable.
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and satellites in the sky.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of network devices and terminal devices.
  • the helicopter or drone 120i in Figure 1 may be configured as a mobile network equipment, for those terminal equipment 120j that accesses the wireless access network 100 through 120i.
  • the terminal device 120i is a network device; but for the network device 110a, 120i is a terminal device, that is, communication between 110a and 120i is through a wireless air interface protocol.
  • communication between 110a and 120i may also be carried out through an interface protocol between network devices.
  • relative to 110a, 120i is also a network device. Therefore, both network equipment and terminal equipment can be collectively called communication devices.
  • 110a and 110b in Figure 1 can be called communication devices with network equipment functions
  • 120a-120j in Figure 1 can be called communication devices with terminal equipment functions. .
  • the functions of the network device may also be executed by modules (such as chips) in the network device, or may be executed by a control subsystem that includes the functions of the network device.
  • the control subsystem here that includes network equipment functions can be the control center in the above application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
  • the functions of the terminal equipment can also be performed by modules in the terminal equipment (such as chips or modems), or can be performed by devices containing the functions of the terminal equipment.
  • the uplink transmission of terminal equipment usually results in insufficient uplink coverage of the base station due to power limitations, insufficient uplink spectrum and other reasons.
  • the NR system introduces supplementary uplink SUL technology.
  • This technology can improve the uplink performance of the base station by using the carrier corresponding to the lower frequency band of the LTE system (such as 700MHz, 800MHz, 1.8GHz, or 2.1GHz, etc.) for NR uplink transmission. cover. That is, when the terminal device transmits UL data in the frequency band of the NR system (such as 2.6GHz, etc.), the terminal device can use the carrier to transmit the UL data in these lower frequency bands of the LTE system according to the channel status and so on.
  • new frequency bands such as 4.9GHz can provide higher bandwidth spectrum resources and have the prospect of being used in NR systems to improve the uplink coverage of base stations.
  • the lower frequency band of the LTE system is marked as SUL 1
  • the frequency band of the NR system is marked as NUL
  • new frequency bands such as 4.9GHz are marked as SUL 2.
  • terminal equipment can support parallel transmission of two or more radio frequency links, which means that terminal equipment can operate on three or more radio frequency links.
  • Carrier switching is performed between more than one carrier.
  • the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1.
  • the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3.
  • the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3.
  • the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 1.
  • the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 4.
  • the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3.
  • current terminal equipment supports dynamic switching between two carriers.
  • the two carriers correspond to the same TA.
  • the switching interval during the switching process of the two carriers is equal to the first value.
  • the corresponding TA of the two carriers is not considered.
  • the frequencies of the three carriers (or four carriers) may belong to multiple frequency bands, then the three carriers (or four carriers) are provided
  • the number of network devices can be multiple, and these network devices can be at the same site (ie, co-site deployment) or at different sites (ie, different site deployment). In the case where these network devices have different addresses, the three TAs (or four TAs) corresponding to the three carriers (or four carriers) may be different.
  • network device 1 and network device 2 can share the same site (i.e., network device 1 and network device 2 are deployed at the same site), as shown in Figure 2A ;
  • network device 1 and network device 2 may also be at different sites (that is, network device 1 and network device 2 are deployed at different sites), as shown in Figure 2B.
  • network device 1 and network device 2 are at different sites, and the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 1 is the same as the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 2, then the terminal device and the network device The TA between 1 and the TA between the terminal device and network device 2 is also the same.
  • network device 1 and network device 2 are at different sites, and the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 1 is different from the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 2, then the terminal device and the network
  • the TA between device 1 and the TA between the terminal device and network device 2 are also different.
  • the network equipment used to provide SUL 1 and the network equipment used to provide NUL may be at the same site or at different sites. However, for the convenience of description, the embodiment of this application uses the network equipment used to provide SUL 1. For example, the network device and the network device used to provide NUL share the same site address.
  • this embodiment of the present application involves carrier switching of a terminal device between three or more carriers.
  • the carrier switching of the terminal device among three carriers and the carrier switching among four carriers are taken as examples in the following.
  • the frequency band where the carrier before switching is located and the frequency band where the carrier is after switching can be different frequency bands, or they can be the same frequency band.
  • the frequency band where the carrier before switching is located and the frequency band where the carrier is after switching are used.
  • the frequency bands are different frequency bands for example.
  • the terminal device switching between multiple carriers in the embodiment of the present application may also be called the terminal device switching between multiple frequency bands.
  • the two frequency bands where the two carriers before switching are located may be the same frequency band or may be different frequency bands.
  • the two frequency bands where the two carriers are located after switching may be the same frequency band or different frequency bands.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application can support parallel transmission of two or more radio frequency links.
  • the following article takes the terminal device supporting parallel transmission of two radio frequency links as an example.
  • the methods provided by various embodiments of the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in Figure 1, Figure 2A or Figure 2B.
  • the terminal equipment involved in various embodiments of the present application may be the terminal equipment shown in any one of 120a-120j in Figure 1, or UE1 or UE2 in Figure 2A, or UE1 or UE2 in Figure 2B.
  • the network device involved in various embodiments of the present application may be the network device shown as 110a or 110b in Figure 1, or the network device 1 or network device 2 in Figure 2A, or the network device 1 or the network in Figure 2B Device 2.
  • FIG 3 is a schematic flowchart of a carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the method flow may include the following content.
  • the network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device. Or the network device configures the first TAG and the second TAG for the terminal device.
  • the first TA (can be recorded as TA1) may be the TA when the terminal device communicates with the network device A.
  • the second TA (can be recorded as TA2) may be the TA when the terminal device communicates with network device B.
  • the first TAG may be the TAG to which TA belongs when the terminal device communicates with network device A.
  • the second TAG may be the TAG to which TA belongs when the terminal device communicates with network device B.
  • the first TA and the second TA may be the same or different.
  • the following description takes the first TA and the second TA as being different as an example. Among them, the first TA belongs to the first TAG, or the first TA is the TA value corresponding to the first TAG.
  • the second TA belongs to the second TAG, or the second TA is the TA value corresponding to the second TAG.
  • TA and TAG please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
  • the network device A may be the network device 1 shown in FIG. 2A or FIG. 2B, and the corresponding network device B may be the network device 2 shown in FIG. 2A or FIG. 2B.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA.
  • the TA in the first TAG is greater than the TA in the second TAG;
  • the network device A can also be the network device 2 shown in Figure 2A or Figure 2B, and the corresponding network device B can be the network device B shown in Figure 2A or Figure 2B.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the TA in the first TAG is larger than the TA in the second TAG.
  • the network device involved in S301 may be network device A, or may be network device A.
  • Device B may also be a network device other than network device A and network device B, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application. Without special explanation, the following article will take as an example whether the network device involved in S301 is network device A or network device B.
  • the network device when the network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, it can be understood that the network device determines the first TA and the second TA; or, it can also be understood that the network device determines the first TA and the second TA, and sends the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device. If the network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, it is understood that the network device determines the first TA and the second TA, then after determining the first TA and the second TA, the network device can also send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device. The first TA and the second TA.
  • the network device configures the first TAG and the second TAG for the terminal device, it can be understood that the network device determines the first TAG and the second TAG; or it can also be understood that the network device determines the first TAG and the second TAG and sends the information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the first TAG and the second TAG. If the network device configures the first TAG and the second TAG for the terminal device, it is understood that the network device determines the first TAG and the second TAG, then after determining the first TAG and the second TAG, the network device can also send the third TAG to the terminal device.
  • One TAG and the second TAG it is taken as an example that the network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, determines the first TA and the second TA for the network device, and sends the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the network device can configure the first TA for the terminal device in the following manner: the network device receives the third TA from the terminal device. A preamble, the first TA is determined based on the first preamble, and the first TA is sent to the terminal device, for example, the first TA is sent to the terminal device through a first random access response message.
  • the network device may configure the second TA for the terminal device in the following manner: the network device receives the second preamble (or the signal strength of the second preamble) from network device B, and according to the second preamble (or the signal strength of the second preamble) (signal strength) determines the second TA and sends the second TA to the terminal device. For example, the network device sends the second TA to the terminal device through a second random access response message; or the network device receives the second TA from network device B. Two TAs are sent to the terminal device. For example, the network device sends the second TA to the terminal device through a second random access response message.
  • the second preamble is the preamble sent by the terminal device to network device B.
  • network device B receives the second preamble from the terminal device and can send the second preamble (or the signal strength of the second preamble) to the network device; or, network device B receives the second preamble from the terminal device.
  • the second TA can be determined according to the second preamble, and the second TA can be sent to the network device. It should be understood that the specific implementation process of the network device configuring the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the network device can first send the first TA to the terminal device, and then send the second TA to the terminal device; or it can also first send the second TA to the terminal device, and then send the first TA to the terminal device; or it can also Send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device at the same time.
  • the first random access response message and the second random access response message may be the same message or different messages, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • S302 The terminal device sends the second message to the network device, and accordingly, the network device receives the second message.
  • the second message includes capability information of the terminal device.
  • the capability information may include one or more of the following information.
  • Information 1 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times. During the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the radio frequency link. Adjustment; or, used to indicate that the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times. During the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the radio frequency link. Adjustment.
  • the terminal equipment supports sending data on two carriers at different times, during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link, which can also be understood as, Whether the terminal equipment supports communication through radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link before the handover of a radio frequency link is completed; or, it can also be understood as whether the terminal equipment supports communication through radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link during the handover process of a radio frequency link.
  • the one radio frequency link is external to the radio frequency link for communication.
  • the terminal equipment has completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 1 but has not completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 2. If the information 1 indicates that the terminal equipment supports the use of radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, channel to communicate, then the terminal device can communicate through the adjusted radio frequency link 1 while adjusting radio frequency link 2. For another example, the terminal equipment has completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 1 but has not completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 2. If the information 1 indicates that the terminal equipment does not support switching through a radio frequency link other than that one before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed. RF link to communicate, then the terminal device cannot communicate through the adjusted RF link 1 while adjusting RF link 2. Instead, it needs to wait for the adjustment of RF link 2 to be completed, and complete the adjustment of RF link 2. Adjusted to allow communication via RF Link 1.
  • the terminal device communicates through the radio frequency link, which can be understood as the terminal device transmits data, control information and other information through the radio frequency link.
  • the following article takes the terminal device transmitting data through the radio frequency link as an example.
  • Information 2 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports or needs to wait for communication through the radio frequency link after the switching of other radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link is completed after the switching of the radio frequency link is completed; or, It is used to instruct the terminal device to support or need to wait for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link to communicate through the one radio frequency link after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed.
  • RF link 1 and RF link 2 as an example, if information 2 indicates that the terminal device needs to wait for other RF links except the first RF link to complete the switch after completing the switch, then pass the If one radio frequency link is used for communication, then when the handover of radio frequency link 1 is completed but the handover of radio frequency link 2 is not completed, the terminal device needs to communicate through radio frequency link 1 after the handover of radio frequency link 2 is completed. If information 2 indicates that the terminal device does not need to wait for other radio frequency links except the first radio frequency link to complete the switching before communicating through the radio frequency link, then the radio frequency link 1. When the switching of RF link 2 is completed but the switching of radio frequency link 2 is not completed, the terminal device can communicate through the radio frequency link 1. There is no need to wait for the completion of the switching of radio frequency link 2 before communicating through the radio frequency link 1.
  • Information 3 can be used to indicate whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs; or, to indicate whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs. For example, whether the terminal device supports carrier switching between the carrier corresponding to the first TA and the carrier corresponding to the second TA. In this embodiment, it is taken as an example that the terminal device supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs. Among them, whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs can be replaced by whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAGs.
  • this information 3 can also be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports different TAs of uplink transmission carriers sent in parallel at the same time unit.
  • information 3 indicates that the terminal device supports uplink transmissions that are sent in parallel at the same time unit. The carriers have different TAs. Then, when the terminal device performs parallel transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 2, the TA corresponding to carrier 1 corresponds to the carrier 2. The TA is different.
  • information 3 indicates that the terminal equipment does not support uplink transmissions sent in parallel at the same time unit. The carriers have different TAs. Then, when the terminal equipment performs parallel transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 2, the TA corresponding to carrier 1 is different from the carrier. 2 corresponds to the same TA.
  • Information 4 may be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value; or, it may be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value.
  • this information 4 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value when switching between multiple frequency bands.
  • a terminal device with a lower chip does not support parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value; a terminal device with a higher chip supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value.
  • the third value please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
  • the network device when the network device performs dynamic scheduling, in addition to the scheduling delay, it also needs to indicate dynamic switching based on the state transition delay.
  • the radio frequency link When switching carriers between different frequency bands, the radio frequency link needs to load some parameters related to the frequency band first, because the time introduced by this loading is called state transition delay.
  • the scheduling delay is the time from receiving or detecting downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) until the uplink data is sent.
  • the state transition delay can be the product of N and the first state transition value (for example, recorded as Tstate_transfer_1), where Tstate_transfer_1 is 300us, 400us, or 500us, etc., and N is a positive integer.
  • the state transition delay can also be the second state transition value (for example, recorded as Tstate_transfer_2), where Tstate_transfer_2 is 500us, 1000us or 1500us, etc.
  • the terminal device can send the state transition delay to the network device. After receiving the state transition delay, the network device needs to add the state transition delay to the scheduling delay K2 as the new uplink scheduling delay.
  • the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier is located after carrier switching, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers are located after carrier switching. Wherein, there is a common frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, which can be understood as the first frequency band and the second frequency band are the same, or it can also be understood as part of the first frequency band and part or all of the second frequency band. Overlapping (or identical).
  • the first frequency band can be replaced with a first frequency band group
  • the second frequency band can be replaced with a second frequency band group.
  • the terminal equipment transmits through carrier 1 and carrier 4 in the first time slot, the frequency band where carrier 1 is located is frequency band A, and the frequency band where carrier 4 is located is frequency band B; in the second time slot, the terminal equipment transmits through carrier 2 and carrier 4. 3 for transmission, the frequency band where carrier 2 is located is frequency band B, and the frequency band where carrier 3 is located is frequency band C.
  • the terminal equipment uses the carrier of frequency band B for data transmission in both the first time slot and the second time slot.
  • Information 6 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the configured fallback frequency band (can be recorded as anchor band); or, it can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the configured fallback frequency band.
  • the fallback frequency band is a frequency band defined when switching between multiple frequency bands.
  • the terminal device sends information 6 to the network device.
  • the information 6 indicates that the terminal device supports the configured fallback frequency band; accordingly, the network device can configure the fallback frequency band for the terminal device according to the information 6.
  • configuring the fallback frequency band for the terminal device is The frequency band where carrier 1 is located (for example, recorded as frequency band A).
  • the terminal equipment can first switch the frequency band where the radio frequency link applied to carrier 4 is located to frequency band A, and then switch the radio frequency link from frequency band A to the frequency band where carrier 3 is located. frequency band.
  • Information 7 can be used to indicate whether the terminal equipment supports carrier switching (carrier switching) in response to the sounding reference signal (SRS) when switching between multiple frequency bands; or, it can be used to indicate when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands. , supports responding to SRS carrier switching; or, is used to instruct the terminal device to support providing dedicated storage space for SRS carrier switching when switching between multiple frequency bands; or is used to instruct the terminal device to support when switching between multiple frequency bands.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the storage space is a radio frequency-related storage space.
  • SRS is allowed to switch among non-uplink carriers to obtain the channel conditions of the downlink carrier.
  • the hardware capabilities of terminal devices are usually fixed, and the amount of storage space that can be carried is also predetermined. If information 7 indicates that the terminal device supports responding to SRS carrier switching when switching between multiple frequency bands, it means that the terminal device can provide dedicated storage space for SRS carrier switching, allowing the terminal device to perform uplink transmission between multiple frequency bands in one time slot. When switching, perform SRS carrier switching. If information 7 indicates that the terminal device does not support SRS carrier switching when switching between multiple frequency bands, it means that the terminal device cannot perform SRS carrier switching when switching uplink transmission between multiple frequency bands within a time slot. In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device can send information 7 to the network device, so that the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch frequency bands based on the information 7 to ensure that the terminal device takes into account SRS carrier switching and uplink transmission switching between multiple frequency bands.
  • the "support” in the above information 1, information 2, information 3, information 4, information 5, information 6 and information 7 can be replaced by “can (or can)", “expect” or “need”, etc. Terminology; accordingly, “whether it is supported” can be replaced by terms such as "whether it is possible (or whether it is possible)", “whether it is expected” or "whether it is needed”. Also, the "frequency band” in the above-mentioned information 4, information 5, information 6 and information 7 can be replaced with "frequency band".
  • time unit may be a time slot, a subframe, a mini-slot, a mini-subframe, etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • S303 The network device sends the first message to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device receives the first message.
  • the network device may send a first message to the terminal device.
  • the first message may be, for example, radio resource control (RRC), MAC message, DCI, etc.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the network device may determine that the terminal device switches carriers, and send the first message to the terminal device.
  • a network device can periodically or Aperiodically determine whether the terminal device needs to switch carriers.
  • the network device can determine whether the terminal device needs to switch carriers based on the measurement report information.
  • the measurement report information may include information such as channel status and/or signal strength.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the content of the measurement report information.
  • the network device may determine that the terminal device switches the carrier. For another example, if the current channel status is good and the current signal strength is good, the network device can determine that the terminal device does not switch carriers. In this embodiment, the network device determines that the terminal device switches carriers as an example.
  • the measurement report information may be information measured by the network device, or may be information measured by the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device switches carriers.
  • the network device may determine whether the terminal device switches carriers based on the measurement report information.
  • the network device receives a second message from the terminal device, and can determine whether the terminal device switches carriers based on the second message, or determines whether the terminal device switches carriers based on the second message and the measurement report information. . It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation manner in which the network device determines whether the terminal device switches carriers.
  • the second message please refer to the relevant content of S302, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device sends the second message to the network device, and accordingly, the network device receives the second message.
  • the network device may send the first message to the terminal device according to the second message.
  • the second message please refer to the relevant content of S302, which will not be described again here.
  • the first message may cause (or trigger) the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set.
  • the first carrier set includes a first carrier (which may be noted as C1), and the second carrier set includes a second carrier (which may be noted as C2) and a third carrier (which may be noted as C3); or, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes the first carrier; or, the first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier (can be recorded as C4), and the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the first carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the second carrier corresponds to the second TA
  • the third carrier corresponds to the first TA
  • the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA. That is, the first carrier and the third carrier correspond to the same TA, and the second carrier and the fourth carrier correspond to the same TA.
  • the first TA and the second TA may be the same or different, and this is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following description takes the first TA and the second TA as different examples.
  • the first carrier corresponds to the first TAG
  • the second carrier corresponds to the second TAG
  • the third carrier corresponds to the first TAG
  • the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TAG. That is, the first carrier and the third carrier correspond to the same TAG, and the second carrier and the fourth carrier correspond to the same TAG.
  • the first TA belongs to the first TAG, or the first TA is the TA value corresponding to the first TAG.
  • the second TA belongs to the second TAG, or the second TA is the TA value corresponding to the second TAG.
  • the first carrier set includes the first carrier, which can be understood to mean that the first carrier set at least includes the first carrier. That is, in addition to the first carrier, the first carrier set may also include at least one other carrier.
  • the other carrier may correspond to the first TA, the second TA, or may be in addition to the first TA and the second TA.
  • TAs other than TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, which may be understood to mean that the second carrier set at least includes the second carrier and the third carrier. That is, in addition to the second carrier and the third carrier, the second carrier set may also include at least one other carrier.
  • the TA corresponding to the other carrier may be the first TA, the second TA, or the TA in addition to the third carrier.
  • TAs other than the first TA and the second TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, which may be understood to mean that the first carrier set at least includes the second carrier and the third carrier. That is, in addition to the second carrier and the third carrier, the first carrier set may also include at least one other carrier.
  • the TA corresponding to the other carrier may be the first TA, the second TA, or the TA in addition to the third carrier.
  • TAs other than the first TA and the second TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the second carrier set includes the first carrier, which may be understood to mean that the second carrier set at least includes the first carrier. That is, in addition to the second carrier, the second carrier set may also include at least one other carrier.
  • the other carrier may correspond to the first TA, the second TA, or may be in addition to the first TA and the second TA.
  • TAs other than TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier, which may be understood to mean that the first carrier set at least includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier. That is, in addition to the first carrier and the fourth carrier, the first carrier set may also include at least one other carrier.
  • the TA corresponding to the other carrier may be the first TA, the second TA, or other than the first TA. TAs other than the first TA and the second TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the second carrier set including the second carrier and the third carrier please refer to the above description and will not be described again here.
  • the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the first carrier is the first TA.
  • the first carrier corresponds to the first TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the first carrier belongs to the first TAG.
  • the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the second carrier is the second TA.
  • the second carrier corresponds to the second TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the second carrier belongs to the second TAG.
  • the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, which can be understood as the connection between the terminal equipment and the network.
  • the TA when network devices communicate through the third carrier is the third TA.
  • the third carrier corresponds to the first TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the third carrier belongs to the first TAG.
  • the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the fourth carrier is the second TA.
  • the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the fourth carrier belongs to the second TAG.
  • the embodiment of this application is described by taking the first carrier corresponding to the first TA, the second carrier corresponding to the second TA, the third carrier corresponding to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponding to the second TA as an example.
  • the first message may instruct (or trigger) the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set through one or more of the following methods.
  • the first carrier set includes the first carrier
  • the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier
  • the first message can trigger the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, or the first message may indicate (or include) the first identifier, or the first message may indicate the terminal
  • the device switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set and indicates the first identifier.
  • the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier or the third carrier; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier. is activated, the second carrier is deactivated, and the third carrier is deactivated, switching to a state where the first carrier is deactivated, the second carrier is activated, and the third carrier is activated; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the state of passing the first carrier to The state of data transmission is switched to the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to (or adjusts to) the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the second carrier set, and switching the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link of the terminal device to the frequency of a carrier in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA; or, It can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches the frequency band (or frequency band) where the first radio frequency link is located to the second carrier.
  • the terminal equipment switches the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the frequency can be replaced by a frequency point.
  • the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier
  • a carrier in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA can be understood as the largest carrier in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to TA can be understood as the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the frequency of the carrier involved in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the frequency of the frequency band in which the carrier is located.
  • the frequency of the first carrier can be understood as the frequency of the frequency band in which the first carrier is located.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message may be used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message is 00, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message is 01, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation of the first message instructing the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first identifier in the first message may be the identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set, or the identifier of a TAG to which a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set belongs.
  • the following description takes an example in which the first identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set.
  • the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set and includes the first identifier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is that of the second TA. identification; alternatively, the A message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is the first TA. or, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the first message may also indicate the carrier for which the first switching interval (which may be recorded as GAP1) is configured.
  • the first switching interval may be the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between the two carriers.
  • the first message may indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, or indicate that the first switching interval
  • the first part (can be recorded as GAP1_1) is configured on the carrier before carrier switching and the remaining part except the first part (can be recorded as GAP1_2) in the first switching interval is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set on the corresponding carrier.
  • the carrier before carrier switching is the first carrier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switch. .
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to TA may be used to indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switching. superior.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA may be configured to indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier before carrier switching, the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message in the embodiment of this application may be one message or multiple messages.
  • the information indicated by the first message may be included in one message or in multiple messages.
  • the first message is two messages. One of the two messages can be used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the other message can be used to indicate the first switching interval. Configured on the carrier before carrier switching.
  • the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier through TA related information (such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the TA identification). Furthermore, the network device may also indicate the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process through TA related information.
  • TA related information such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the TA identification.
  • the first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier
  • the second carrier set includes the first carrier
  • the first message can trigger the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, or the first message may indicate (or include) the second identifier, or the first message may indicate the terminal
  • the device switches from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier and indicates the second identifier.
  • the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier; or, it can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the second carrier is activated, the third carrier is activated and the first carrier is deactivated, and the state switches to a state where the second carrier is deactivated, the third carrier is deactivated, and the first carrier is activated; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches from passing through the second carrier to The state of data transmission with the third carrier is switched to the state of data transmission with the first carrier.
  • the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier. It can be understood that the terminal device will apply the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the The first carrier is switched for uplink transmission; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches the frequency band (or frequency band) of the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the frequency band (or frequency band) of the first carrier, and turning off radio frequency links applied to carriers in the first carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA.
  • the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, it can be understood that the terminal device switches the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  • the frequency of a carrier, and closing the radio frequency links of carriers in the first carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the largest TA can be understood as the terminal device switching from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier Perform uplink transmission; alternatively, it can be understood as the terminal device concentrating the maximum amount of the first carrier Switch the frequency band (or frequency band) where the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the TA is located to the frequency band (or frequency band) where the first carrier is located, and close the radio frequency link applied to the carriers in the first carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the largest TA .
  • the first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier
  • the carriers in the second carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA can be understood as the maximum TA in the second carrier set corresponding carrier.
  • the carriers in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the largest TA can be understood as the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set.
  • the value of the first message may be used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set.
  • the value of the first message is 10, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  • the value of the first message is 11, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation of the first message instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  • the second identifier in the first message may be an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, or an identifier of a TAG to which a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set belongs.
  • the following description takes an example in which the second identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set.
  • the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier and includes the second identifier. For example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identifier in the first message is that of the second TA. identification; or, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identification in the first message is the identification of the first TA.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identifier in the first message is the first TA. or, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identifier in the first message is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the first message may also indicate the carrier for which the first switching interval is configured.
  • the first switching interval is the time period for the terminal equipment to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  • the first message may indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, or indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set and the first part of the first switching interval is excepted
  • the remaining part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or indicates that the first part in the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set and the first switching interval
  • the remaining parts except the first part are configured on the carrier after carrier switching. It should be understood that in the second method, the carrier after the carrier switching is the first carrier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set. On the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier after the carrier switch. superior.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured after the carrier switching. on the carrier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and indicate that the first part of the first switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier.
  • the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after carrier switching.
  • the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier through TA related information (such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the TA identification). Furthermore, the network device may also indicate the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process through TA related information.
  • TA related information such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the TA identification.
  • Method 3 The first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier, and the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the first message can trigger the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Switch to the third carrier, or trigger the terminal equipment to switch from the first carrier to the third carrier, or from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or maximum TA in the second carrier set, or the first message may indicate (or include) The third identification and the fourth identification, or the first message instructs the terminal equipment to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set and includes the third identification and Fourth logo.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. It can be understood that the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or it can be understood that the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA or it is understood that the first message instructs the terminal equipment to switch from the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the second carrier set; or it is understood that the first message instructs the terminal equipment Switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may also instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and to switch to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, it can be understood that It means that the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment is activated from the first carrier, the fourth carrier is activated, the second carrier is deactivated, and The state in which the third carrier is deactivated switches to the state in which the first carrier is deactivated, the fourth carrier is deactivated, the second carrier is activated, and the third carrier is activated; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the state where the first carrier and the fourth carrier are activated.
  • the state of the carrier for data transmission is switched to the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the first carrier set includes two carriers
  • the second carrier set includes two carriers.
  • the terminal equipment switches from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the second carrier set (or the terminal equipment switches from the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the maximum TA in the second carrier set) carrier), it can be understood that the terminal device switches the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to (or adjusts) the frequency corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and Switch the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the second carrier set; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches from the minimum TA in the first carrier set
  • the corresponding carrier switches to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission, and switches from the carrier corresponding to the largest
  • the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set (or the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier set).
  • the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA can be understood as the terminal device switches the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and applies The frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the frequency corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the frequency corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to The carrier is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission, and the carrier is switched from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission; or, it can be understood as The terminal equipment switches the frequency band (or frequency band) of the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the frequency band (or frequency
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message may be used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message is 00, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message is 01, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message is 10
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the value of the first message is 11, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not include the specific implementation of the first message instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or maximum TA in the second carrier set. It is not limited to this.
  • the first message includes a third identification and a fourth identification.
  • the third identifier may be an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, or an identifier of a TAG to which a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set belongs.
  • the fourth identifier may be an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set, or an identifier of a TAG to which a corresponding TA in the second carrier set belongs.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the third identifier may be the second The identity of the TA.
  • the fourth identity may be the identity of the second TA.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third identifier may be the
  • the fourth identifier may be the identifier of one TA, and the fourth identifier may be the identifier of the second TA. The other situations are similar and will not be listed one by one here.
  • the first message may also indicate the carrier for which the second switching interval (which may be noted as GAP2) and the third switching interval (which may be noted as GAP3) are configured.
  • the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the first carrier to the second carrier
  • the third switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier.
  • the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the first carrier to the third carrier
  • the third switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  • the first message may indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or it may indicate the second switching.
  • the interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or it is indicated that the second switching interval is configured on the largest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the first part of the third switching interval (can be recorded as GAP3_1) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the third switching interval except the first part (can be recorded as GAP3_2) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set; or indicates that the first part of the second switching interval (can be recorded as GAP2_1) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set above, the remainder of the second switching interval except the first part (which can be recorded as GAP2_2) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the largest TA in the first carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to TA.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
  • the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier switch corresponding to the largest TA in a carrier set Switch to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. on the carrier, and the remaining part in the third switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the first message may also indicate that the first part of the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier through the relevant information of the TA (such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the identification of the TA). Or switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Furthermore, the network device may also indicate the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process through TA related information.
  • the network device can first configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, and then send the first message to the terminal device; or, the network device can also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device and at the same time, send the first message to the terminal device.
  • the device sends the first message; or, the network device can also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device after sending the first message to the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network device may first configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, and then receive the second message from the terminal device; or the network device may also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device. At the same time, a second message is received from the terminal device; or, the network device can also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device after receiving the second message from the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • S304 The terminal device switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message.
  • the terminal device may switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set through one or more of the aforementioned manner 1, 2 or 3.
  • the following describes the specific implementation process of the terminal device switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set for the first, second and third methods respectively.
  • the first carrier set includes the first carrier
  • the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the corresponding carrier and/or includes (or indicates) the first identifier.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier according to the first message.
  • the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process may be indicated by the network device, or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. For convenience of description, this embodiment of the present application takes the carrier for which the network device indicates that the first switching interval is configured as an example.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier according to the first message.
  • the terminal equipment can switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set within the first value, and switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the third
  • the duration used by the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the two-carrier set may be the first value, or may be other values, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device can switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency corresponding to the carrier with the largest TA in the second carrier set within the first value, and switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the second carrier.
  • the duration occupied by the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the concentration can be the first value, Or it can also be other values, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the first value please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switching. superior.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first message.
  • the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier.
  • the first switching interval may be located on a corresponding carrier of the first carrier.
  • the end of the time slot (can be recorded as time slot 1).
  • the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 4; or, the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 5 Show.
  • the difference between the first value and the second value can be understood as the absolute value of the difference between the first value and the second value.
  • the second value which may also be called the TA difference, is the difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the second value may be the absolute value of the difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to information 1 (and/or information 2), that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is the first value. In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device determines the value of the first switching interval based on information 1 as an example. It should be understood that when the terminal device determines the value of the first switching interval based on information 2 (or information 1 and information 2), please refer to The terminal device determines the relevant content of the value of the first switching interval based on the information 1.
  • the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed.
  • the terminal device can determine the first switching interval as based on the information 1. The difference between the first value and the second value, so that even if the terminal equipment has not completed the switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, the terminal equipment can start to pass the third carrier after time T2 (not shown in Figure 4) and before time T1.
  • Carrier waves transmit data, which can improve data transmission efficiency and improve resource utilization.
  • time T1 is the time when the terminal device starts transmitting data in time slot 2.
  • Time T2 may be the completion time when the terminal device switches the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier.
  • time T2 may be a time between the starting time when the terminal device adjusts the first radio frequency link and time T1.
  • time T2 is taken as the starting time of time slot 2 as an example.
  • the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed.
  • the terminal device can determine the first switching based on the information 1.
  • the interval is a first value, so that the terminal device can start transmitting data through the third carrier at the completion time of switching from the first carrier to the second carrier (i.e., the starting time of slot 2 or the end time of slot 1), which can improve data transmission efficiency and improve resource utilization.
  • the terminal device can also determine that the first switching interval is the first value and the first value. The difference between the two values, in this case, the terminal device needs to start transmitting data through the second carrier and/or the third carrier at time T1.
  • the start time (or start time) of the terminal device transmitting data on the carrier can be determined by the terminal device itself (such as puncturing the data), or it can be determined by the network device based on information 1 , the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed
  • the terminal device sends information 1 to the network device
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, and the terminal device sends information 1 to the network device.
  • the terminal device can be scheduled to transmit data on the third carrier at time T1 according to the information 1.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device corresponding to the first TA (denoted as network device 1) is longer than the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device corresponding to the second TA.
  • the communication distance between devices means that the terminal device needs more time in advance to transmit data on the first carrier or the third carrier. For example, the terminal device starts transmitting data on the first carrier or the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2. Data is transmitted on three carriers, and data is transmitted on the second carrier starting at time T1. The difference between the starting time of time slot 2 and time T1 is equal to the difference between the first TA and the second TA, as shown in Figure 4.
  • the terminal equipment can switch from the first carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the second carrier corresponding to the smaller TA.
  • the TA difference between the two carriers can be used to compensate for the interruption of the carrier when the two carriers are switched.
  • the duration is shortened from the duration that originally needs to interrupt the first value to the duration that is the difference between the first value and the second value, thereby reducing the duration that the terminal device interrupts data transmission on the carrier, and improving resource utilization.
  • the head of a time slot is usually used to transmit control information, and the tail of a time slot is usually used to transmit data.
  • the terminal equipment configures the first switching interval at the end of time slot 1, although the terminal equipment is interrupted through the first carrier in the The data transmission at the end of time slot 1 will not affect the transmission of control information through the first carrier in this time slot 1. Moreover, the terminal equipment configures the first switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching, which can avoid affecting the terminal equipment through the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the transmission of carrier control information enables the network device to timely schedule the data transmission of the terminal device on the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the second carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, although the TA difference between the two carriers is not used to compensate for the switching of the two carriers.
  • data is transmitted through the third carrier in advance to improve data transmission efficiency and resource utilization.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switching. superior.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier according to the first message.
  • the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier.
  • the first switching interval may be located on a corresponding carrier of the first carrier.
  • the end of the time slot (can be recorded as time slot 1).
  • the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 6; or, the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 7 Show.
  • time T1 is a time between the starting time when the terminal equipment adjusts the first radio frequency link and the end time of time slot 1, as shown in Figures 6 and 7 .
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device 2 is farther than the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device 1, which means that the terminal device needs to advance more time to transmit data on the second carrier.
  • the terminal device starts transmitting data on the second carrier at time T1 and starts transmitting data on the third carrier at the starting time of time slot 2.
  • This time T1 is the same as the time of time slot 2.
  • the difference in starting time is equal to the difference between the second TA and the first TA, as shown in Figure 6.
  • the terminal equipment switches between two carriers with the same TA and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment configures the first switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching and is located at the end of time slot 1, which can avoid affecting the transmission of control information through the first carrier in time slot 1 and avoid affecting the transmission of the terminal equipment through the third carrier.
  • the transmission of control information of the second carrier and the third carrier enables the network device to timely schedule the data transmission of the terminal device on the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and the first switching interval is configured as the sum of the first value and the second value, which can reserve enough time for the terminal device. Adjust the RF link.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the second carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the second carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the terminal device can communicate through the third radio frequency link at the beginning of time slot 2.
  • the carrier transmits data, and/or the second carrier transmits data at time T3.
  • the terminal device may transmit data through the third carrier at time T3, and/or At time T3, data is transmitted via the second carrier.
  • time T3 is the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, which is located after the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 8 .
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the first carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the second carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, so that the TA between the two carriers can be utilized.
  • the difference is used to compensate for the length of time that the carrier is interrupted when the two carriers are switched.
  • the length of time that originally needs to be interrupted is shortened from the length of time that needs to be interrupted to the length of time that is the difference between the first value and the second value. This can reduce the interruption of data transmission by terminal equipment on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the second carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine the first switching interval to be the first value, as shown in Figure 9.
  • the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T1, and /or pass the third at time T4 Carrier waves transmit data.
  • the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T4, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T4.
  • time T4 is the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, which is located after the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 9 .
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal device processing. Spend.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier before carrier switching, the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the second carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the first part is the second value and the remaining part is the first value, as shown in Figure 10; or, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the second value. value, as shown in Figure 11.
  • the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2.
  • the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T3.
  • time T3 may be located after the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 10; or it may be the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 11.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, and configures a part of the first switching interval in the first On the carrier, the remaining part is configured on the second carrier, so that the TA difference between the first carrier and the second carrier can be used to transmit data in parallel through the second carrier and the third carrier as soon as possible, improving data transmission efficiency.
  • the first message includes the first identifier.
  • the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the third carrier according to the first identifier.
  • the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first identifier.
  • the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured and the size of the first switching interval can be determined with reference to the relevant descriptions in FIGS. 4 to 11 , which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal equipment when the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, the terminal equipment can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link applied by the terminal equipment to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier and switch the terminal
  • the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link of the device is switched to the frequency of the third carrier; or the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link can be switched to the frequency of the second carrier first, and then the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched. to the frequency of the third carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier first, and then switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency of the second carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier.
  • the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link is first switched to the frequency of the second carrier, and during the switching process, the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the third carrier. This is not limited by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal equipment when the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, the terminal equipment can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link of the terminal equipment applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the third carrier and change the third frequency of the terminal equipment.
  • the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the second carrier; or the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link can be switched to the frequency of the third carrier first, and then the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the second carrier.
  • the frequency of the carrier or you can also first switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the second carrier, and then switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier; or you can also first switch the frequency corresponding to the third carrier.
  • the frequency corresponding to one radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the third carrier, and during the switching process, the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the second carrier. This is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier
  • the second carrier set includes the first carrier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier.
  • a carrier and/or includes (or indicates) a second identifier.
  • the terminal device switches from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message.
  • the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process may be indicated by the network device or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. For convenience of description, this embodiment of the present application takes the carrier for which the network device indicates that the first switching interval is configured as an example.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to select the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA from the first carrier set.
  • the first carrier is switched to the first carrier, and the terminal device switches from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message.
  • the terminal device may switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link applied to the second carrier by the terminal device to the frequency of the first carrier within the first value, and close the fourth radio frequency chain applied to the third carrier.
  • the duration of the road may be the first value, or may be another value, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device can switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier within the first value, and the time period for closing the third radio frequency link can be the first value, or it can be other values. value, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application. For the description of the first value, please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine the first switching interval to be the first value, as shown in Figure 12.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device configures the first switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching, which can avoid affecting the transmission of control information of the terminal device through the first carrier, so that the network device can timely schedule the data transmission of the terminal device on the first carrier.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured after the carrier switching. on the carrier.
  • the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 13.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal device.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA.
  • the terminal device switches from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the second carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 14.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the second carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the first carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, so that the TA between the two carriers can be utilized.
  • the difference is used to compensate for the length of time that the carrier is interrupted when the two carriers are switched.
  • the length of time that originally needs to be interrupted is shortened from the length of time that needs to be interrupted to the length of time that is the difference between the first value and the second value. This can reduce the interruption of data transmission by terminal equipment on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured after the carrier switching. on the carrier.
  • the terminal device switches from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 15 .
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the second carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the first carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, so that the TA between the two carriers can be utilized.
  • the difference is used to compensate for the length of time that the carrier is interrupted when the two carriers are switched.
  • the length of time that originally needs to be interrupted is shortened from the length of time that needs to be interrupted to the length of time that is the difference between the first value and the second value. This can reduce the interruption of data transmission by terminal equipment on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the second carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the second carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the second carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after carrier switching.
  • the terminal device switches from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the second carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the first carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the first part is the second value and the remaining part is the first value, as shown in Figure 18; or, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the second value. value, as shown in Figure 19.
  • the first message includes the second identification.
  • the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the terminal device can switch from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the second identifier.
  • the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the second identifier.
  • the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured and the size of the first switching interval can be determined with reference to the relevant descriptions in FIGS. 12 to 19 , which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal equipment when the terminal equipment switches from the second carrier to the first carrier, the terminal equipment can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link applied by the terminal equipment to the second carrier to the frequency of the first carrier and turn off the terminal.
  • the device is applied to the fourth radio frequency link of the third carrier; or you can first switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier, and then turn off the fourth radio frequency link; or you can also turn off the fourth radio frequency first. link, and then switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier first, and then turn it off during the switching process.
  • the fourth radio frequency link is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier, the terminal device can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link applied by the terminal device to the third carrier to the frequency of the first carrier and close the terminal device application.
  • the third radio frequency link of the second carrier or you can first switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier, and then close the third radio frequency link; or you can also close the third radio frequency link first , and then switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier first, and then turn off the third radio frequency link during the switching process.
  • the radio frequency link is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier
  • the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier.
  • the first message may instruct the terminal device to select the minimum TA or the maximum TA from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier is switched to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes (or indicates) the third identifier and the fourth identifier.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message; or, switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier Switch to the second carrier.
  • the carrier for which the second switching interval is configured may be indicated by the network device, or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the carrier configured for the third switching interval may be indicated by the network device, or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • this embodiment of the present application takes the network device as an example to indicate the carrier in which the second switching interval is configured and the carrier in which the third switching interval is configured.
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and the terminal device switches according to the first
  • the message is switched from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set
  • the third switching interval is configured On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier according to the first message.
  • the second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the third switching interval is configured on the fourth carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 20; or, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the third switching interval is the first value.
  • the third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 21.
  • the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2.
  • the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T5.
  • time T5 is the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, as shown in Figures 20 and 21.
  • the first TA is greater than the second TA
  • the terminal equipment switches between two carriers with the same TA
  • both the second switching interval and the third switching interval are configured as the first value, so that Reduce terminal device processing complexity.
  • the terminal device configures the third switching interval as the sum of the first value and the second value, which can reserve more time for the terminal device to adjust the radio frequency link.
  • the terminal equipment configures the second switching interval and the third switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching, which can avoid affecting the transmission of control information of the terminal equipment through the second carrier and the third carrier, so that the network equipment can schedule the terminal equipment in a timely manner Data transmission on the second and third carriers.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the third switching interval is configured On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier according to the first message.
  • the second switching interval is configured on the third carrier.
  • the third switching interval configured on the second carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 22; or, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the first value.
  • the sum of the second value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in FIG. 23 .
  • the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at time T5.
  • the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T5.
  • time T4 may be before time T5, as shown in Figure 22; or time T4 may also be time T5, as shown in Figure 23.
  • the first TA is greater than the second TA
  • the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA
  • both the second switching interval and the third switching interval are configured as the first value, so that Reduce terminal device processing complexity.
  • the terminal device configures the second switching interval on the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value. In this way, the first TA and the second value can be used.
  • the TA difference between TAs compensates for the transmission delay on the second carrier and the third carrier, and regardless of whether the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the handover of one radio frequency link is completed, All terminal devices can transmit data in parallel on the second carrier and the third carrier at the same time, which can improve data transmission efficiency.
  • the first TA is greater than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device Switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is Configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, the second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the third switching The interval is configured on the fourth carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 24 .
  • the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and/ Or transmit data through the third carrier at time T3.
  • the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, so that The TA difference between the first carrier and the second carrier is used to compensate for the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, reducing the original time required to interrupt the first value to the time required to interrupt the first value and the second The length of time the terminal device interrupts data transmission on the carrier can be reduced and resource utilization can be improved.
  • the terminal equipment configures the third switching interval as the sum of the first value and the second value, can reserve more time to adjust the radio frequency link, and uses the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the second carrier and the second carrier.
  • the transmission delay between the third carriers that is, the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the second carrier and the completion time of the fourth carrier switching to the third carrier can be equal, so that the terminal equipment can pass the second carrier and the third carrier at the same time.
  • the third carrier performs parallel transmission to improve data transmission efficiency.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from
  • the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set
  • the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set
  • the third switching interval is configured On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the terminal According to the first message, the device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier.
  • the second switching interval is configured on the second carrier
  • the third switching interval is configured on the third carrier. on the carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 25; or, the terminal device It can be determined that the second switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in FIG. 26 .
  • time T6 may be the completion time of the terminal device switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier.
  • the time T6 may be before the time T3, as shown in FIG. 25; or the time T6 may also be the time T3, as shown in FIG. 26.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval on the second carrier.
  • the second switching interval is The sum of the first value and the second value can reserve more time to adjust the radio frequency link.
  • the terminal equipment configures the third switching interval on the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, and can use the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the fourth carrier switching.
  • the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process of reaching the third carrier is reduced from the length of time that originally needs to interrupt the first value to the length of time that the difference between the first value and the second value needs to be interrupted, thereby reducing the risk of terminal equipment interrupting data transmission on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval on the second carrier.
  • the second switching interval is The sum of the first value and the second value can reserve more time to adjust the radio frequency link.
  • the terminal equipment configures the third switching interval on the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and use the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the third switching interval.
  • the transmission delay between the second carrier and the third carrier that is, the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the second carrier and the completion time of the fourth carrier switching to the third carrier, can be equal, so that the terminal equipment can pass the third carrier at the same time.
  • the second carrier and the third carrier are transmitted in parallel to improve data transmission efficiency.
  • the first TA is larger than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device Switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, in the third switching interval
  • the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the third switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, the second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the third switching The first part of the interval is configured on the fourth carrier, and the remaining part of the third switching interval except the first part is configured on the third carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, the first part is the second value and the remaining part is the first value, as shown in FIG. 27 .
  • the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at time T6.
  • the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T6, and/or At time T6, data is transmitted via the third carrier.
  • time T6 is located after time T3, as shown in Figure 27.
  • the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval on the first carrier.
  • the second switching interval is The difference between the first value and the second value can use the TA difference between the first carrier and the second carrier to compensate for the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, reducing the need to interrupt the first value
  • the duration is shortened to the duration of the difference between the first interrupt value and the second value, thereby reducing the duration for the terminal device to interrupt data transmission on the carrier, and improving resource utilization.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device Switching from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicating that the first part of the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the The remainder of the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
  • the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, and the first part of the second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, The remainder of the second switching interval except the first part is configured in the On the second carrier, the third switching interval is configured on the fourth carrier.
  • the terminal device may determine that the first part is the second value, the remaining part is the first value, and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 28 .
  • the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2.
  • the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T3.
  • the starting time of time slot 2 is time T6, and time T3 is located after time T6, as shown in Figure 28.
  • the first TA is smaller than the second TA
  • the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the third switching interval on the fourth carrier.
  • the third switching interval is The difference between the first value and the second value can use the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the fourth carrier to the third carrier, reducing the need to interrupt the first value
  • the duration is shortened to the duration of the difference between the first interrupt value and the second value, thereby reducing the duration for the terminal device to interrupt data transmission on the carrier, and improving resource utilization.
  • the first message includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier. Switch to the second carrier.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Switch to third carrier.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
  • the terminal device can switch from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and from the first carrier to the third carrier.
  • the carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  • the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA
  • the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA.
  • the terminal device can switch from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and from the first carrier to the second carrier.
  • the carrier is switched to the third carrier.
  • the starting time of the second switching interval and the starting time of the third switching interval may be the same or different.
  • the starting time for the terminal equipment to switch between the two pairs of carriers may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the third carrier and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier at the same time; or, it can also switch from the first carrier to the third carrier first, and then from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. carrier; or, you can also switch from the fourth carrier to the second carrier first, and then switch from the first carrier to the third carrier; or, you can also switch from the fourth carrier during the process of switching from the first carrier to the third carrier. to the second carrier and so on.
  • the terminal equipment can switch from the first carrier to the second carrier and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier at the same time; or, it can also switch from the first carrier to the second carrier first, and then switch from the fourth carrier to the third carrier.
  • the terminal device periodically sends the second value to the network device.
  • the second value which may also be called the TA difference, is the difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the second value may be the absolute value of the difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  • the terminal device may periodically send the second value as capability information to the network device.
  • the period value at which the terminal device sends the second value is less than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the first threshold is a small value, which may be predefined, or may be pre-negotiated between the terminal device and the network device, or may be configured by the network device for the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the terminal device reports the second value to the network device in a smaller period, which can increase the frequency of the terminal device reporting the second value to the network device and reduce the delay in updating the second value in time due to the movement of the terminal device.
  • the second value sent to the network device causes the second value on the network device side to be different from the second value on the terminal device side, so that the network device can obtain the updated second value of the terminal device in a timely manner.
  • the terminal device can periodically or aperiodically send the second value to the network device, and use the second value after the sending is completed, such as determining the first switching based on the second value. interval, the second switching interval or the third switching interval, etc.
  • the terminal device uses the second value after sending the second value to the network device. This can prevent the terminal device from not sending the updated second value to the network device in time after updating the second value, causing network problems.
  • the second value on the device side is inconsistent with the second value on the terminal device side.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information to the network device periodically or aperiodically.
  • the first indication information may indicate a range of TA difference values to which the second value belongs.
  • the first indication information can be understood as a TA difference level (level), or as an index of a TA difference level, or the like.
  • the terminal device sends the TA difference range to which the second value belongs to the network device.
  • the terminal device does not send the updated second value to the network device in time.
  • the updated second value may belong to the TA difference range. , this can reduce the difference between the second value on the network device side and the updated second value on the terminal device side, reduce the frequency of the terminal device reporting the second value to the network device, and save network resources.
  • the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application are introduced from the perspective of interaction between network devices and terminal devices.
  • the terminal device or network device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module to implement the above functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. .
  • Figures 29 and 30 are schematic structural diagrams of possible communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device can be used to implement the functions of the terminal equipment or network equipment in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device may be one of the terminal devices 120a-120j as shown in Figure 1, or may be the network device 110a or 110b as shown in Figure 1, or may be applied to the terminal device. Or modules of network equipment (such as chips).
  • the communication device 2900 includes a processing module 2901 and a transceiver module 2902.
  • the communication device 2900 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device or network device in the method embodiment shown in any one of the above-mentioned Figures 3 to 28.
  • the transceiver module 2902 is used to receive the first message from the network device, and the processing module 2901, used to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, and the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier , the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum time advance TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a first identifier, the first The identifier is the identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message Instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and/or include a second
  • the transceiver module 2902 may be used to send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
  • the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
  • the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
  • the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
  • the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
  • the processing module 2901 is used to configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, and a transceiver module 2902, configured to send a first message to the terminal device; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message Instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or include a first identifier, and the first identifier is a carrier in the second carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in a carrier set is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or , the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects the smallest carrier from the first carrier set.
  • the carrier corresponding to the TA or the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is in the first carrier set.
  • the identification of the TA corresponding to a carrier, the first The fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier in the second carrier set; wherein the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, and the third carrier corresponds to the third A TA, the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  • the transceiving module 2902 may be configured to receive a second message from the terminal device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
  • the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
  • the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
  • the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located.
  • the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
  • the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
  • communication device 3000 includes processor 3010 .
  • the communication device 3000 may also include a communication interface 3020 (indicated by a dotted line in Figure 30).
  • the processor 3010 and the communication interface 3020 are coupled to each other. It can be understood that the communication interface 3020 may be a transceiver or an input-output interface.
  • the communication device 3000 may also include a memory 3030 (indicated by a dotted line in Figure 30) for storing instructions executed by the processor 3010 or input data required for the processor 3010 to run the instructions or storage after the processor 3010 executes the instructions. generated data.
  • the memory 3030, the processor 3010 and the communication interface 3020 are connected through a bus 3040.
  • instructions may also refer to computer programs, codes, program codes, programs, applications, software, or executable files.
  • the processor 3010 is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned processing module 2901
  • the communication interface 3020 is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned transceiver module 2902.
  • the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the terminal equipment chip receives information from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the terminal equipment, and the information is sent by the network equipment to the terminal equipment; or, the terminal equipment chip sends information to other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the terminal equipment.
  • Antenna sends information, which is sent by the terminal device to the network device.
  • the network device module When the above communication device is a module applied to a network device, the network device module implements the functions of the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the network device module receives information from other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or antenna), which is sent by the terminal device to the network device; or, the network device module sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or antenna).
  • Antenna sends information, which is sent by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the network equipment module here can be the baseband chip of the network equipment, or it can be a DU or other module.
  • the DU here can be a DU under the open radio access network (open radio access network, O-RAN) architecture.
  • processor in the embodiment of the present application can be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), or application-specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • a general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware or by a processor executing software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory In memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium well known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and storage media may be located in an ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC can be located in network equipment or terminal equipment. Of course, the processor and the storage medium can also exist as discrete components in network equipment or terminal equipment.
  • This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program or instructions.
  • the steps executed by the network device or the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments are implemented. method.
  • the functions described in the above embodiments can be implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or contributes to the technical solution or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes a number of instructions. So that a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) executes all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
  • Storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory ROM, random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.
  • the computer program product includes: computer program code.
  • the computer program code When the computer program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute any of the foregoing method embodiments executed by a terminal device or a network device. Methods.
  • This application also provides a system, which includes a terminal device and/or a network device.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method executed by the terminal device or network device involved in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or other programmable device.
  • the computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
  • the computer program or instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits via wired or wireless means to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media, such as floppy disks, hard disks, and magnetic tapes; optical media, such as digital video optical disks; or semiconductor media, such as solid-state hard disks.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be volatile or nonvolatile storage media, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile types of storage media.
  • information information
  • signal signal
  • message messages
  • channel channel

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a carrier switching method and apparatus, applied to a terminal device. The method comprises: receiving a first message from a network device, and switching from a first carrier set to a second carrier set according to the first message, wherein the first carrier set comprises a first carrier, the second carrier set comprises a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs a terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to a minimum timing advance (TA) or a maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or comprises a first identifier; or the first carrier set comprises the second carrier and the third carrier, and the second carrier set comprises the first carrier; or the first carrier set comprises the first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set comprises the second carrier and the third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to a minimum TA or a maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or comprises a third identifier and a fourth identifier.

Description

一种载波切换方法及装置A carrier switching method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-references to related applications
本申请要求在2022年07月14日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210832744.4、申请名称为“一种载波切换方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office of China on July 14, 2022, with application number 202210832744.4 and the application title "A carrier switching method and device", the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference. Applying.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种载波切换方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a carrier switching method and device.
背景技术Background technique
新无线(new radio,NR)系统中,终端设备的上行传输通常因功率受限、上行链路(uplink,UL)频谱(spectrum)不够等原因导致基站的上行覆盖不足。为此,NR系统引入增补上行(supplementary UL,SUL)技术,该技术通过将长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统的较低频段(如,700兆赫兹(MHz)、800MHz、1.8吉赫兹(GHz)、或2.1GHz等)对应的载波用于NR上行传输,可以提高基站的上行覆盖。即,当终端设备在NR系统的频段(如2.6GHz等)传输UL数据时,该终端设备可以根据信道状态等在LTE系统的这些较低频段中使用载波传输该UL数据,这就需要终端设备在两个载波间进行动态切换。例如,终端设备可以从2.6GHz的载波切换至1.8GHz的载波。In new radio (NR) systems, the uplink transmission of terminal equipment usually results in insufficient uplink coverage of base stations due to power limitations and insufficient uplink (UL) spectrum. To this end, the NR system introduces supplementary uplink (SUL) technology, which combines the lower frequency bands of the long term evolution (LTE) system (such as 700 MHz (MHz), 800 MHz, 1.8 GHz ( GHz), or 2.1GHz, etc.) is used for NR uplink transmission, which can improve the uplink coverage of the base station. That is, when the terminal device transmits UL data in the frequency band of the NR system (such as 2.6GHz, etc.), the terminal device can use the carrier to transmit the UL data in these lower frequency bands of the LTE system according to the channel status, etc., which requires the terminal device to Dynamic switching between two carriers. For example, the terminal device can switch from a 2.6GHz carrier to a 1.8GHz carrier.
随着用户需求的日益增加以及新频段(如4.9GHz)的使用,终端设备可以支持两个或两个以上的射频链路的并行传输,这意味着终端设备可以在三个或三个以上的载波间进行载波切换。例如,在时隙1中,终端设备通过载波1进行上行传输,在时隙1的下一个时隙中,终端设备可以切换载波,通过载波2和载波3进行上行传输。又例如,在时隙1中,终端设备通过载波2和载波3进行上行传输,在时隙1的下一个时隙中,终端设备可以切换载波,通过载波1进行上行传输。再例如,在时隙1中,终端设备通过载波1和载波4进行上行传输,在时隙1的下一个时隙中,终端设备可以切换载波,通过载波2和载波3进行上行传输。但如何实现终端设备在三个载波或四个载波间的载波切换,目前尚未有相应的技术方案。With the increasing needs of users and the use of new frequency bands (such as 4.9GHz), terminal equipment can support parallel transmission of two or more radio frequency links, which means that terminal equipment can operate on three or more Carrier switching between carriers. For example, in time slot 1, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1. In the next time slot of time slot 1, the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3. For another example, in time slot 1, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3. In the next time slot of time slot 1, the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 1. For another example, in time slot 1, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 4. In the next time slot of time slot 1, the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3. However, there is currently no corresponding technical solution for how to implement carrier switching of terminal equipment between three carriers or four carriers.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种载波切换方法及装置,用以实现终端设备在三个载波或四个载波之间的载波切换。Embodiments of the present application provide a carrier switching method and device to implement carrier switching of a terminal device between three carriers or four carriers.
第一方面,本申请提供一种载波切换方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者由终端设备的部件执行,在该方法中:接收来自网络设备的第一消息,以及根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集;其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或包括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。In a first aspect, the present application provides a carrier switching method, which can be executed by a terminal device or by a component of the terminal device. In the method: a first message is received from a network device, and according to the first message , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal The device switches from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum time advance TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a first identifier, and the first identifier is one of the second carrier sets. The identification of the TA corresponding to the carrier; or, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes the first carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to obtain the information from the first carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, where the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or, The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the largest TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is one in the first carrier set. The identifier of the TA corresponding to the carrier, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; wherein the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一消息,并根据该第一消息的指示内容,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,实现了终端设备在三个载波或四个载波之间的切换。并且,该第一消息可以通过TA的相关信息来指示终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device receives the first message from the network device, and switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the instruction content of the first message, thereby realizing the terminal device operating on three carriers or four carriers. switching between carriers. Furthermore, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set through TA related information.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的 最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波或切换至所述第三载波。In an optional implementation, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier in the set. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA; the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or switching to the second carrier set. third carrier.
在上述方式中,终端设备根据该第一消息的指示内容,可以确定将应用于第一载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第二载波的频率或调整到第三载波的频率,能够从通过第一载波进行数据传输的状态切换至通过第二载波和第三载波进行数据传输的状态,从而终端设备能够通过第二载波和第三载波进行并行传输,提高数据传输效率。In the above method, the terminal device can determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier or to the frequency of the third carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, and can adjust the frequency from The state of data transmission on the first carrier is switched to the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier, so that the terminal device can perform parallel transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier, thereby improving data transmission efficiency.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,或者为第一值;In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值,或者为第一值与第二值之和;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set. On the corresponding carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
在上述方式中,终端设备根据该第一消息的指示内容,可以确定从第一载波切换至第二载波或切换至第三载波的过程中被中断的载波,以及该载波被中断的时长。In the above manner, the terminal device can determine the carrier that is interrupted during switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, and the duration of the interruption of the carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,所述第一标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。In an optional implementation manner, the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be the first identifier. The first carrier is switched to the third carrier; or the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
在上述方式中,终端设备可以根据该第一消息中携带的TA的标识,确定将应用于第一载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第二载波的频率或者调整到第三载波的频率。In the above manner, the terminal device may determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier or to the frequency of the third carrier according to the TA identifier carried in the first message.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波;所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为从所述第二载波或所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波。In an optional implementation, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier; , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
在上述方式中,终端设备根据该第一消息的指示内容,可以确定将应用于第二载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第一载波的频率,或者确定将应用于第三载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第一载波的频率,能够从通过第二载波和第三载波进行数据传输的状态切换至通过第一载波进行数据传输的状态,可以减少终端设备的功耗。In the above method, the terminal device may determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the second carrier to the frequency of the first carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, or determine to adjust the radio frequency link applied to the third carrier. The frequency corresponding to the channel is adjusted to the frequency of the first carrier, which can switch from the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier to the state of data transmission through the first carrier, which can reduce the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;In an optional implementation, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set. A carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, the method further includes: determining the The first switching interval is a first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差; Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching. The method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value. The difference from the second value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值与第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be the difference between the first value and the second value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier switching On the subsequent carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
在上述方式中,终端设备根据该第一消息的指示内容,可以确定从第二载波或第三载波切换至第一载波的过程中被中断的载波,以及该载波被中断的时长。In the above manner, the terminal device can determine the carrier that is interrupted during the switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier and the duration of the interruption of the carrier according to the instruction content of the first message.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波;或者,所述第二标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第二载波切换至所述第一载波。In an optional implementation manner, the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA. The third carrier is switched to the first carrier; or the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the second carrier is switched to the first carrier.
在上述方式中,终端设备可以根据该第一消息中携带的TA的标识,确定将应用于第二载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第一载波的频率或者将应用于第三载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第一载波的频率。In the above method, the terminal device can determine, based on the TA identification carried in the first message, to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the second carrier to the frequency of the first carrier or to adjust the radio frequency applied to the third carrier. The frequency corresponding to the link is adjusted to the frequency of the first carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波。In an optional implementation, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. The corresponding carrier; the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
在上述方式中,终端设备根据该第一消息的指示内容,可以确定将应用于第一载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第二载波的频率,以及将应用于第四载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第三载波的频率,或者确定将应用于第一载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第三载波的频率,以及将应用于第四载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第二载波的频率,能够从通过第一载波和第四载波进行数据传输的状态切换至通过第二载波和第三载波进行数据传输的状态。In the above method, the terminal device can determine, according to the instruction content of the first message, to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier, and to adjust the radio frequency link applied to the fourth carrier. Adjust the corresponding frequency to the frequency of the third carrier, or determine to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the third carrier, and adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the fourth carrier to The frequency of the second carrier can be switched from a state of data transmission through the first carrier and a fourth carrier to a state of data transmission through the second carrier and a third carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与第二值之和;In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the set, and/or instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also Instructing that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: Determine the second switching interval to be a first value and the third switching interval to be the first value, or determine the second switching interval to be a first value and the third switching interval to be the first value the sum of the second value;
或者,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第 一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the third On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in a carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval to be the sum of the first value and the The difference between the second values;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value. and the third switching interval is the first value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,所述第一部分为所述第二值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval except The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the first portion being the second value and the remaining portion being the first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值,所述剩余部分为第一值,以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval The first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on the carrier, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part as a second value, and the remaining part as a first value , and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;其中,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process of switching to the second carrier; wherein the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the first The difference between TA and the second TA.
在上述方式中,终端设备根据该第一消息的指示内容,可以确定从第一载波切换至第二载以及从第四载波切换至第三载波,或从第一载波切换至第三载波以及从第四载波切换至第二载波的过程中被中断的载波,以及该载波被中断的时长。In the above manner, the terminal device may determine to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the instruction content of the first message, or to switch from the first carrier to the third carrier and from The carrier that was interrupted when the fourth carrier was switched to the second carrier, and the length of time that the carrier was interrupted.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为:In an optional implementation, the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be:
所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波;The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier;
或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;Alternatively, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier is switched to the third carrier;
或者,所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;Alternatively, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. The carrier is switched to the third carrier;
或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。Alternatively, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and from the first The carrier is switched to the second carrier.
在上述方式中,终端设备可以根据该第一消息中携带的TA的标识,确定将应用于第一载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第二载波的频率以及将第四载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第三载波的频率,将应用于第一载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第三载波的频率以及将第四载波的射频链路对应的频率调整到第二载波的频率。In the above method, the terminal device can determine, based on the TA identification carried in the first message, to adjust the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier and to adjust the radio frequency link of the fourth carrier. The corresponding frequency is adjusted to the frequency of the third carrier, the corresponding frequency of the radio frequency link applied to the first carrier is adjusted to the frequency of the third carrier, and the corresponding frequency of the radio frequency link applied to the fourth carrier is adjusted to the frequency of the second carrier .
在一种可选的实现方式中,该方法还可以包括:向所述网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:In an optional implementation, the method may further include: sending a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
所述终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在所述两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,所述两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整; Whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,是否支持等待除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过所述一条射频链路进行通信;Or, after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, whether the terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link after waiting for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换;Or, the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输,所述第三值是终端设备支持的在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长;Or, whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
或者,终端设备是否支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段,其中,所述第一频段是载波切换前的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换前的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段,所述第二频段是载波切换后的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换后的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located. One or more frequency bands, the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持被配置回退频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a configured fallback frequency band;
或者,所述终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持响应探测参考信号载波切换。Or, when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
在上述方式中,终端设备可以向网络设备上报自身的能力信息,以便网络设备可以根据该能力信息指示终端设备进行三个载波间的切换或进行四个载波间的切换。In the above method, the terminal device can report its own capability information to the network device, so that the network device can instruct the terminal device to perform handover between three carriers or perform handover between four carriers based on the capability information.
在一种可选的实现方式中,该方法还可以包括:接收来自所述网络设备的所述第一TA和所述第二TA。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: receiving the first TA and the second TA from the network device.
第二方面,本申请提供一种载波切换方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者由终端设备的部件执行。该方法包括:向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:In a second aspect, this application provides a carrier switching method, which can be executed by a terminal device or by a component of the terminal device. The method includes: sending a second message to the network device, the second message including one or more of the following information:
所述终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在所述两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,所述两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整;Whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,是否支持等待除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过所述一条射频链路进行通信;Or, after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, whether the terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link after waiting for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换;Or, the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输,所述第三值是终端设备支持的在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长;Or, whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
或者,终端设备是否支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段,其中,所述第一频段是载波切换前的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换前的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段,所述第二频段是载波切换后的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换后的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located. One or more frequency bands, the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持被配置回退频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a configured fallback frequency band;
或者,所述终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持响应探测参考信号载波切换。Or, when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
在一种可选的实现方式中,该方法还可以包括:接收来自网络设备的第一消息,以及根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集;其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或包括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;In an optional implementation, the method may further include: receiving a first message from the network device, and switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message; wherein the first A carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates a minimum time for the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the advance TA or the maximum TA, and/or includes a first identifier, which is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier , and/or includes a second identifier, the second identifier being an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or, the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, and the third carrier The two carrier sets include a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the first carrier set to the smallest TA or the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the largest TA, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, the third identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, and the fourth identifier is the second carrier The identification of the TA corresponding to one of the concentrated carriers;
其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波或切换至所述第三载波。In an optional implementation manner, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set; according to the first message , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,或者为第一值; In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值,或者为第一值与第二值之和;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set. On the corresponding carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,所述第一标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。In an optional implementation manner, the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be the first identifier. The first carrier is switched to the third carrier; or the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波;所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为从所述第二载波或所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波。In an optional implementation, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier; , switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set may be switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;In an optional implementation, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set. A carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, the method further includes: determining the The first switching interval is a first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It is also indicated that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching. The method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value. The difference from the second value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值与第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be the difference between the first value and the second value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier switching On the subsequent carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波;或者,所述第二标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第二载波切换至所述第一载波。In an optional implementation manner, the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be that the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA. The third carrier is switched to the first carrier; or the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the second carrier is switched to the first carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;In an optional implementation, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. Corresponding carrier;
所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为从所述第一载波切换至所述第二 载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波。The switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be switching from the first carrier to the second carrier set. carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与第二值之和;In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the set, and/or instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also Instructing that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: Determine the second switching interval to be a first value and the third switching interval to be the first value, or determine the second switching interval to be a first value and the third switching interval to be the first value the sum of the second value;
或者,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value. and the third switching interval is the first value;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,所述第一部分为所述第二值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval except The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the first portion being the second value and the remaining portion being the first value;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值,所述剩余部分为第一值,以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval The first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on the carrier, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part as a second value, and the remaining part as a first value , and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;其中,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。 Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process of switching to the second carrier; wherein the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the first The difference between TA and the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可以为:In an optional implementation, the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message may be:
所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波;The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier;
或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;Alternatively, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier is switched to the third carrier;
或者,所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;Alternatively, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. The carrier is switched to the third carrier;
或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。Alternatively, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and from the first The carrier is switched to the second carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,该方法还可以包括:接收来自所述网络设备的所述第一TA和所述第二TA。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: receiving the first TA and the second TA from the network device.
第三方面,本申请提供一种载波切换方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者由网络设备的部件执行。该方法包括:为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA,以及向所述终端设备发送第一消息;其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;In a third aspect, the present application provides a carrier switching method, which can be executed by a network device or by a component of the network device. The method includes: configuring a first TA and a second TA for a terminal device, and sending a first message to the terminal device; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, and the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a first identifier, and the third carrier An identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或包括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;Alternatively, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA or a maximum TA from the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the TA is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, where the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;Alternatively, the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a carrier from the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the carrier in the first carrier set. The identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier in the second carrier set;
其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set. on the corresponding carrier;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the first identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上;In an optional implementation, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set. A carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最 小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects the highest value from the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the small TA is switched to the first carrier, the first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the first The remainder of the switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after carrier switching;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the second identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the set, and/or instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also Indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval except The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval The first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on the carrier, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识;或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA; or, the third identification is the identification of the second TA. The identifier of the TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or, The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,该方法还可以包括:接收来自所述终端设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种: In an optional implementation, the method may further include: receiving a second message from the terminal device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
所述终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在所述两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,所述两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整;Whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,是否支持等待除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过所述一条射频链路进行通信;Or, after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, whether the terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link after waiting for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换;Or, the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输,所述第三值是终端设备支持的在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长;Or, whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
或者,终端设备是否支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段,其中,所述第一频段是载波切换前的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换前的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段,所述第二频段是载波切换后的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换后的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located. One or more frequency bands, the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持被配置回退频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a configured fallback frequency band;
或者,所述终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持响应探测参考信号载波切换。Or, when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述向所述终端设备发送第一消息,可以为根据所述第二消息向所述终端设备发送所述第一消息。In an optional implementation manner, sending the first message to the terminal device may be sending the first message to the terminal device according to the second message.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA,可以为:向所述终端设备发送所述第一TA和所述第二TA。In an optional implementation manner, configuring the first time advance TA and the second TA for the terminal device may include: sending the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
第四方面,本申请提供一种载波切换方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者由网络设备的部件执行。该方法包括:接收来自终端设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a carrier switching method, which may be executed by a network device or by a component of the network device. The method includes: receiving a second message from the terminal device, the second message including one or more of the following information:
所述终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在所述两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,所述两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整;Whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,是否支持等待除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过所述一条射频链路进行通信;Or, after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, whether the terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link after waiting for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换;Alternatively, the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输,所述第三值是终端设备支持的在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长;Or, whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
或者,终端设备是否支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段,其中,所述第一频段是载波切换前的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换前的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段,所述第二频段是载波切换后的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换后的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located. One or more frequency bands, the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持被配置回退频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a configured fallback frequency band;
或者,所述终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持响应探测参考信号载波切换。Or, when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
在一种可选的实现方式中,该方法还可以包括:为终端设备配置第一时间提前量和TA和第二TA,以及向所述终端设备发送第一消息;其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;In an optional implementation, the method may further include: configuring a first time advance and TA and a second TA for the terminal device, and sending a first message to the terminal device; wherein the first carrier The set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates a minimum time advance for the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the TA or the maximum TA, and/or includes a first identifier, where the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或包括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;Alternatively, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA or a maximum TA from the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the TA is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, where the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;Alternatively, the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a carrier from the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the carrier in the first carrier set. The identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier in the second carrier set;
其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the smallest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第 二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the third carrier. The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set. on the corresponding carrier;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the first identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上;In an optional implementation, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier set. A carrier, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the The first message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and that the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured Configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message It is also indicated that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier switching on the subsequent carrier;
其中,所述第一切换间隔是所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the second identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;In an optional implementation, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the set, and/or instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, the first message also Indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示 第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. The remaining part of the three handover intervals except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set;
或者,所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;Alternatively, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. carrier, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that in the second switching interval The first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on the carrier, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识;或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识。In an optional implementation manner, the third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA; or, the third identification is the identification of the second TA. The identifier of the TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA; or, The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述向所述终端设备发送第一消息,可以为根据所述第二消息向所述终端设备发送所述第一消息。In an optional implementation manner, sending the first message to the terminal device may be sending the first message to the terminal device according to the second message.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA,可以为:向所述终端设备发送所述第一TA和所述第二TA。In an optional implementation manner, configuring the first time advance TA and the second TA for the terminal device may include: sending the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
第五方面,本申请提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置用于执行为上述第一方面及第一方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法,或者用于执行上述第二方面及第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。该通信装置例如为终端设备,或为终端设备中的功能模块,例如基带装置或芯片系统等。一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)和收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)。收发单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能,在收发模块实现发送功能时,可称为发送模块(有时也称为发送单元),在收发模块实现接收功能时,可称为接收模块(有时也称为接收单元)。发送模块和接收模块可以是同一个功能模块,该功能模块称为收发模块,该功能模块能实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,收发模块是对这些功能模块的统称。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device is used to perform the method described in the above-mentioned first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or is used to perform the method described in the above-mentioned second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. method described. The communication device is, for example, a terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system. In a possible implementation, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another possible implementation, the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit). The transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the receiving module). receiving unit). The sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules.
第六方面,本申请提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置用于执行为上述第三方面及第三方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法,或者用于执行上述第四方面及第四方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。该通信装置例如为网络设备,或为网络设备中的功能模块,例如基带装置或芯片系统等。一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)和收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)。收发单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能,在收发模块实现发送功能时,可称为发送模块(有时也称为发送单元),在收发模块实现接收功能时,可称为接收模块(有时也称为接收单元)。发送模块和接收模块可以是同一个功能模块,该功能模块称为收发模块,该功能模块能实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,收发模块是对这些功能模块的统称。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device is used to perform the method described in the above third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or is used to perform the method described in the above fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect. method described. The communication device is, for example, a network device, or a functional module in the network device, such as a baseband device or a chip system. In a possible implementation, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another possible implementation, the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit). The transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the receiving module). receiving unit). The sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules.
第七方面,本申请提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以包括一个或多个处理器。可选地,该通信装置还可以包括存储器。其中,所述存储器用于存储一个或多个计算机程序或指令。所述一个或多个处理器用于执行所述存储器存储的所述一个或多个计算机程序或指令,以使得所述通信装置执行上述第一方面及第一方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法,或者执行上述第二方面及第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communications device may include one or more processors. Optionally, the communication device may also include a memory. Wherein, the memory is used to store one or more computer programs or instructions. The one or more processors are configured to execute the one or more computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the first aspect and any of the possible implementations of the first aspect. The method described above, or perform the method described in the above second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
第八方面,本申请提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以包括一个或多个处理器。可选地,该通信装置还可以包括存储器。其中,所述存储器用于存储一个或多个计算机程序或指令。所述一个或多个处理器用于执行所述存储器存储的所述一个或多个计算机程序或指令,以使得所述通信装置执行上述第三 方面及第三方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法,或者执行上述第四方面及第四方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communications device may include one or more processors. Optionally, the communication device may also include a memory. Wherein, the memory is used to store one or more computer programs or instructions. The one or more processors are configured to execute the one or more computer programs or instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the above third The method described in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect and the third aspect, or perform the method described in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect and the fourth aspect.
第九方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序或指令,当其被运行时,使得上述第一方面及第一方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现;或者使得上述第二方面及第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现;或者使得上述第三方面及第三方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现;或者使得上述第四方面及第四方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store computer programs or instructions that, when executed, make any one of the above-mentioned aspects possible. The method described in the implementation mode is realized; or the method described in the implementation mode making any one of the above second aspect and the second aspect possible is realized; or making any one of the above third aspect and the third aspect possible The method described in the implementation manner is implemented; or the method described in the above fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect is implemented.
第十方面,本申请提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述第一方面及第一方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现;或者使得上述第二方面及第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现;或者使得上述第三方面及第三方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现;或者使得上述第四方面及第四方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法被实现。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions that, when run on a computer, enable the method described in the above first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect to be implemented; or enable The method described in the above second aspect and any possible implementation of the second aspect is implemented; or the method described in the above third aspect and any possible implementation of the third aspect is implemented; or so that The method described in the above fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect is implemented.
第十一方面,本申请还提供一种芯片,所述芯片与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行所述存储器中的程序指令,以使得所述芯片所在装置实现上述第一方面及第一方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法;或者以使得所述芯片所在装置实现上述第二方面及第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法;或者以使得所述芯片所在装置实现上述第三方面及第三方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法;或者以使得所述芯片所在装置实现上述第四方面及第四方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application also provides a chip, which is coupled to a memory and used to read and execute program instructions in the memory, so that the device where the chip is located realizes the above first aspect and the first aspect. The method described in any possible implementation manner; or in such a way that the device where the chip is located implements the above second aspect and the method described in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect; or in such a way that the chip is located in The device implements the method described in any one of the above third aspect and the possible implementation manner of the third aspect; or the device where the chip is located implements the method described in any one of the above fourth aspect and the possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect. Methods.
第十二方面,本申请还提供一种通信系统,包括上述第五方面所述的通信装置,和/或上述第六方面所述的通信装置。In a twelfth aspect, the present application further provides a communication system, including the communication device described in the fifth aspect, and/or the communication device described in the sixth aspect.
上述第二方面至第十二方面及其任一项可能的实现方式所能达到的技术效果请相应参照上述第一方面及其任一项可能的实现方式所能达到的技术效果,这里不再重复赘述。For the technical effects that can be achieved by the above-mentioned second to twelfth aspects and any of their possible implementation methods, please refer to the technical effects that can be achieved by the above-mentioned first aspect and any of their possible implementation methods, which will not be discussed here. Repeat.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例适用的通信系统的一种示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the embodiment of the present application;
图2A为本申请实施例中基站1与基站2共站址一种示意图;Figure 2A is a schematic diagram of base station 1 and base station 2 sharing the same site in the embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例中基站1与基站2异站址一种示意图;Figure 2B is a schematic diagram of the different site addresses of base station 1 and base station 2 in the embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的载波切换方法的一种流程示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of a carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4至图28为本申请实施例提供的载波切换的示意图;Figures 4 to 28 are schematic diagrams of carrier switching provided by embodiments of the present application;
图29为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种示意图;Figure 29 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图30为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的又一种示意图。Figure 30 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面首先对本申请实施例涉及的部分用语进行解释说明。In order to make the purpose, technical solutions, and advantages of the embodiments of the present application clearer, some terms involved in the embodiments of the present application are first explained below.
(1)时间提前量(timing advance,TA),可包括上行TA,或包括下行TA,或包括上行TA和下行TA。该上行TA,用于上行传输,指为了将终端设备的上行数据包在希望的时间到达基站,预估由于终端设备与基站之间的距离引起的射频传输时延,提前相应时间发送该上行数据包。该下行TA,用于下行传输,指为了将基站的下行数据包在希望的时间到达终端设备,预估由于终端设备与基站之间的距离引起的射频传输时延,提供相应时间发送该下行数据包。(1) Timing advance (TA), which can include uplink TA, downlink TA, or uplink TA and downlink TA. The uplink TA is used for uplink transmission. In order to make the uplink data packets of the terminal equipment reach the base station at the desired time, the radio frequency transmission delay caused by the distance between the terminal equipment and the base station is estimated and the uplink data is sent in advance accordingly. Bag. The downlink TA is used for downlink transmission. In order to make the downlink data packets from the base station reach the terminal equipment at the desired time, the radio frequency transmission delay caused by the distance between the terminal equipment and the base station is estimated, and the corresponding time is provided to send the downlink data. Bag.
(2)时间提前量组(timing advance group,TAG),包括一个或多个服务小区,一个TAG具有相同的TA。(2) Timing advance group (TAG), including one or more serving cells, and a TAG has the same TA.
(3)切换间隔(switch gap),又可以称为中断时间,打断时间等,可理解为因在载波切换过程中调整射频(radio frequency,RF)链路等原因载波被中断(或被打断)的时间段(或时长);或者,也可以理解为终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路时载波被中断(或被打断)的时间段(或时长)。(3) Switch gap, also known as interruption time, interruption time, etc., can be understood as the carrier being interrupted (or hit) due to adjustments to the radio frequency (RF) link during the carrier switching process. The time period (or duration) during which the carrier is interrupted (or interrupted) when the terminal device adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers.
载波因载波切换被中断(或被打断),可称为切换间隔被配置在该载波上,或称为切换间隔位于该载波上等,本申请实施例不作限定。为了便于描述,后文以切换间隔被配置在载波上为例。进一步,若载波被配置切换间隔,意味着在该切换间隔内终端设备不能通过该载波接收信号,也不能通过该载波发送信号。When a carrier is interrupted (or interrupted) due to carrier switching, it can be said that the switching interval is configured on the carrier, or it can be said that the switching interval is located on the carrier, etc. This is not limited by the embodiments of the present application. For the convenience of description, the following takes the handover interval configured on the carrier as an example. Furthermore, if the carrier is configured with a switching interval, it means that the terminal device cannot receive signals through the carrier during the switching interval, nor can it send signals through the carrier.
例如,终端设备从载波1切换到载波2,切换间隔被配置在载波1上,那么在该切换间隔内终端设 备不能通过该载波1接收信号,也不能通过该载波1发送信号。又例如,终端设备从载波1切换到载波2,切换间隔被配置在载波2上,那么在切换间隔内终端设备不能通过该载波2接收信号,也不能通过该载波2发送信号。再例如,终端设备从载波1切换至载波2,切换间隔中的一部分被配置在载波1上,该切换间隔中除了该一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波2上,那么在该一部分内终端设备不能通过载波1接收信号,也不能通过载波1接收信号,以及在该剩余部分内终端设备不能通过载波2接收信号,也不能通过载波2接收信号。For example, if the terminal device switches from carrier 1 to carrier 2, and the switching interval is configured on carrier 1, then the terminal device switches during the switching interval. The device cannot receive signals through this carrier 1, nor can it send signals through this carrier 1. For another example, if the terminal device switches from carrier 1 to carrier 2, and the switching interval is configured on carrier 2, then the terminal device cannot receive signals through carrier 2 during the switching interval, nor can it send signals through carrier 2. For another example, the terminal equipment switches from carrier 1 to carrier 2, a part of the switching interval is configured on carrier 1, and the remaining part of the switching interval except this part is configured on carrier 2, then the terminal device within this part The device cannot receive a signal over carrier 1, nor over carrier 1, and the terminal device cannot receive a signal over carrier 2, nor over carrier 2, within this remainder.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例涉及的调整射频链路可以理解为射频调整(RF tuning),或者也可以理解为射频重调整(RF retuning)等。It should be noted that the adjustment of the radio frequency link involved in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as radio frequency adjustment (RF tuning), or it can also be understood as radio frequency re-adjustment (RF retuning), etc.
(4)本申请实施例涉及的第一值(可记为switch period),可理解为一个固定值,是终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,例如是相同TA对应的两个载波间调整射频链路的时长。该第一值可以是预定义的一个固定值,或者也可以是网络设备确定的一个固定值,或者还可以是终端设备确定的一个固定值,但本申请实施例并不限定于此。例如,该第一值可以是网络设备根据终端设备的能力信息确定、并发送给终端设备的一个固定值。又例如,该第一值可以根据终端设备根据自身的能力信息确定、并发送给网络设备的一个固定值。(4) The first value (can be recorded as switch period) involved in the embodiment of this application can be understood as a fixed value, which is the time period for the terminal device to adjust the radio frequency link between two carriers, for example, two corresponding TAs corresponding to the same TA. Adjust the duration of the RF link between carriers. The first value may be a predefined fixed value, or may be a fixed value determined by the network device, or may be a fixed value determined by the terminal device, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the first value may be a fixed value determined by the network device based on the capability information of the terminal device and sent to the terminal device. For another example, the first value may be a fixed value determined by the terminal device based on its own capability information and sent to the network device.
(5)本申请实施例涉及的第三值,可以理解为终端设备支持的在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,或者也可以理解为终端设备在两个频段之间切换时所需要的时长,或者还可以理解为终端设备从一个支持一个或多个射频链路的频段切换至另一个支持一个或多个射频链路的频段时所需的时长。该第三值可以是由终端设备的硬件条件等确定的。该第三值例如可以是35微秒(us)、140us、210us或280us等,本申请实施例对第三值并不限定于此。应理解的是,第三值的数量可以是一个,也可以是多个。(5) The third value involved in the embodiment of this application can be understood as the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal equipment, or it can also be understood as the time required for the terminal equipment to switch between two frequency bands. Duration, or can also be understood as the time required for a terminal device to switch from one frequency band that supports one or more radio frequency links to another frequency band that supports one or more radio frequency links. The third value may be determined by hardware conditions of the terminal device, etc. The third value may be, for example, 35 microseconds (us), 140us, 210us, or 280us, etc. The third value in the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. It should be understood that the number of the third value may be one or multiple.
可选的,终端设备可以根据该第三值确定第一值。例如,第三值为多个,终端设备可以从多个第三值中确定其中的一个第三值为第一值。又例如,第三值为一个,终端设备可以确定该一个第三值为第一值。Optionally, the terminal device may determine the first value based on the third value. For example, there are multiple third values, and the terminal device may determine one of the third values as the first value from the multiple third values. For another example, the third value is one, and the terminal device may determine that the third value is the first value.
可选的,终端设备可以将第三值作为自身的能力信息发送给网络设备,如通过无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令发送给网络设备。进一步,网络设备可以根据该第三值确定第一值,并向终端设备发送第一值。例如,第三值为多个,网络设备可以从多个第三值中确定其中的一个第三值为第一值。又例如,第三值为一个,网络设备可以确定该一个第三值为第一值。Optionally, the terminal device can send the third value to the network device as its own capability information, such as through radio resource control (RRC) signaling. Further, the network device may determine the first value according to the third value, and send the first value to the terminal device. For example, there are multiple third values, and the network device may determine one of the third values as the first value from the multiple third values. For another example, the third value is one, and the network device may determine that the third value is the first value.
(6)本申请实施例中“多个”是指两个或两个以上,鉴于此,本申请实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“至少一个”,可理解为一个或多个,例如理解为一个、两个或更多个。例如,包括至少一个,是指包括一个、两个或更多个,而且不限制包括的是哪几个,例如,包括A、B和C中的至少一个,那么包括的可以是A、B、C、A和B、A和C、B和C、或A和B和C。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,字符“/”,如无特殊说明,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。本申请实施例中的术语“根据”和“基于”可被互换使用。(6) In the embodiments of this application, "plurality" means two or more. In view of this, "plurality" in the embodiments of this application can also be understood as "at least two". "At least one" can be understood as one or more, for example, one, two or more. For example, including at least one means including one, two or more, and it does not limit which ones are included. For example, if it includes at least one of A, B and C, then it can include A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C. "And/or" describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/", unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship. The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of this application may be used interchangeably. The terms "according to" and "based on" in the embodiments of this application may be used interchangeably.
除非有相反的说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。例如,本申请实施例涉及的第一载波、第二载波、第三载波以及第四载波用于对多个载波进行区分,并不限定该多个载波的优先级或重要程度。又例如,本申请实施例涉及的第一TA和第二TA用于对多个TA进行区别,并不限定该多个TA的大小、优先级或重要程度。Unless otherwise stated, ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects. For example, the first carrier, the second carrier, the third carrier and the fourth carrier involved in the embodiment of the present application are used to distinguish multiple carriers and do not limit the priority or importance of the multiple carriers. For another example, the first TA and the second TA involved in the embodiment of this application are used to distinguish multiple TAs and do not limit the size, priority or importance of the multiple TAs.
另外,在本申请实施例中,“示例的”一词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例的”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例的”一词旨在以具体方式呈现概念。In addition, in the embodiments of this application, the word "exemplary" is used to represent an example, illustration or explanation. Any embodiment or design described herein as "exemplary" is not intended to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of the word "exemplary" is intended to present the concept in a concrete way.
本申请将围绕可包括多个设备、组件、模块等的系统来呈现各个方面、实施例或特征。应当理解和明白的是,各个系统可以包括另外的设备、组件、模块等,并且/或者可以并不包括结合附图讨论的所有设备、组件、模块等。此外,还可以使用这些方案的组合。This application will present various aspects, embodiments, or features in terms of systems, which may include multiple devices, components, modules, etc. It should be understood and appreciated that various systems may include additional devices, components, modules, etc., and/or may not include all devices, components, modules, etc. discussed in connection with the figures. Additionally, a combination of these scenarios can be used.
下面介绍本申请实施例适用的通信系统。The communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application is introduced below.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系 统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线(new radio,NR)系统,或者应用于未来的通信系统或其它类似的通信系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as long term evolution (LTE) systems. system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system or new radio (new radio, NR) system , or applied to future communication systems or other similar communication systems.
图1是本申请的实施例应用的通信系统的架构示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统1000包括无线接入网100和核心网200。可选地,通信系统1000还可以包括互联网300。其中,无线接入网100可以包括至少一个网络设备,如图1中的110a和110b,还可以包括至少一个终端设备,如图1中的120a-120j。其中,110a是基站,110b是微站,120a、120e、120f和120j是手机,120b是汽车,120c是加油机,120d是布置在室内或室外的家庭接入节点(home access point,HAP),120g是笔记本电脑,120h是打印机,120i是无人机。其中,同一个终端设备或网络设备,在不同应用场景中可以提供不同的功能。比如,图1中的手机有120a、120e、120f和120j,手机120a可以接入基站110a,连接汽车120b,与手机120e直连通信以及接入到HAP,手机120b可以接入HAP以及与手机120a直连通信,手机120f可以接入为微站110b,连接笔记本电脑120g,连接打印机120h,手机120j可以控制无人机120i。Figure 1 is a schematic architectural diagram of a communication system applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, the communication system 1000 includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200. Optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include the Internet 300. The wireless access network 100 may include at least one network device, such as 110a and 110b in Figure 1, and may also include at least one terminal device, such as 120a-120j in Figure 1. Among them, 110a is a base station, 110b is a micro station, 120a, 120e, 120f and 120j are mobile phones, 120b is a car, 120c is a gas pump, and 120d is a home access point (HAP) arranged indoors or outdoors. 120g is a laptop, 120h is a printer, and 120i is a drone. Among them, the same terminal device or network device can provide different functions in different application scenarios. For example, the mobile phones in Figure 1 include 120a, 120e, 120f and 120j. Mobile phone 120a can access the base station 110a, connect to the car 120b, directly communicate with the mobile phone 120e and access the HAP. The mobile phone 120b can access the HAP and communicate with the mobile phone 120a. For direct communication, mobile phone 120f can be connected as micro station 110b, connected to laptop 120g, connected to printer 120h, and mobile phone 120j can control drone 120i.
网络设备是一种具有无线收发功能的网络侧设备。网络设备可以是无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)中为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置,称为RAN设备。例如,该无线接入网设备,可以是基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、第六代(6th generation,6G)移动通信系统中的基站、未来移动通信系统中的基站或WiFi系统中的接入节点等;也可以是完成基站部分功能的模块或单元,例如,可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),也可以是分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。这里的CU完成基站的无线资源控制协议和分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)的功能,还可以完成业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)的功能;DU完成基站的无线链路控制层和介质访问控制(medium access control,MAC)层的功能,还可以完成部分物理层或全部物理层的功能,有关上述各个协议层的具体描述,可以参考第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)的相关技术规范。网络设备可以是宏基站(如图1中的110a),也可以是微基站或室内站(如图1中的110b)或高频基站,还可以是中继节点或施主节点等。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。Network equipment is a network-side device with wireless transceiver functions. The network equipment can be a device in the radio access network (RAN) that provides wireless communication functions for terminal equipment, which is called RAN equipment. For example, the wireless access network equipment may be a base station (base station), an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNodeB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system The next generation base station (next generation NodeB, gNB), the base station in the sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) mobile communication system, the base station in the future mobile communication system or the access node in the WiFi system, etc.; it can also be completed Modules or units with some functions of the base station, for example, can be a centralized unit (CU) or a distributed unit (DU). The CU here completes the functions of the base station's radio resource control protocol and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), and can also complete the functions of the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP); DU completes the functions of the base station The functions of the wireless link control layer and medium access control (MAC) layer can also complete some or all of the physical layer functions. For specific descriptions of each of the above protocol layers, please refer to the Third Generation Partner Program (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) related technical specifications. The network device may be a macro base station (110a in Figure 1), a micro base station or an indoor station (110b in Figure 1), a high-frequency base station, a relay node or a donor node, etc. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the network equipment.
终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的用户侧设备。终端设备也可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端等。终端设备可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端设备可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请实施例中,用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备,也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统或可实现终端设备功能的组合器件、部件,该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。The terminal device is a user-side device with wireless transceiver function. Terminal equipment can also be called terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile station, mobile terminal, etc. Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle to everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), and the Internet of Things (internet of things, IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc. Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver functions, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, etc. In the embodiment of the present application, the device used to realize the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or may be a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system or a combined device or component that can realize the function of the terminal device. The device Can be installed in terminal equipment. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the terminal equipment.
网络设备和终端设备可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。网络设备和终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对网络设备和终端设备的应用场景不做限定。Network equipment and terminal equipment can be fixed-location or removable. Network equipment and terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; they can also be deployed on water; they can also be deployed on aircraft, balloons and satellites in the sky. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of network devices and terminal devices.
网络设备和终端设备的角色可以是相对的,例如,图1中的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成移动网络设备,对于那些通过120i接入到无线接入网100的终端设备120j来说,终端设备120i是网络设备;但对于网络设备110a来说,120i是终端设备,即110a与120i之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然,110a与120i之间也可以是通过网络设备与网络设备之间的接口协议进行通信的,此时,相对于110a来说,120i也是网络设备。因此,网络设备和终端设备都可以统一称为通信装置,图1中的110a和110b可以称为具有网络设备功能的通信装置,图1中的120a-120j可以称为具有终端设备功能的通信装置。The roles of network equipment and terminal equipment may be relative. For example, the helicopter or drone 120i in Figure 1 may be configured as a mobile network equipment, for those terminal equipment 120j that accesses the wireless access network 100 through 120i. , the terminal device 120i is a network device; but for the network device 110a, 120i is a terminal device, that is, communication between 110a and 120i is through a wireless air interface protocol. Of course, communication between 110a and 120i may also be carried out through an interface protocol between network devices. In this case, relative to 110a, 120i is also a network device. Therefore, both network equipment and terminal equipment can be collectively called communication devices. 110a and 110b in Figure 1 can be called communication devices with network equipment functions, and 120a-120j in Figure 1 can be called communication devices with terminal equipment functions. .
在本申请的实施例中,网络设备的功能也可以由网络设备中的模块(如芯片)来执行,也可以由包含有网络设备功能的控制子系统来执行。这里的包含有网络设备功能的控制子系统可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述应用场景中的控制中心。终端设备的功能也可以由终端设备中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行,也可以由包含有终端设备功能的装置来执行。 In the embodiments of the present application, the functions of the network device may also be executed by modules (such as chips) in the network device, or may be executed by a control subsystem that includes the functions of the network device. The control subsystem here that includes network equipment functions can be the control center in the above application scenarios such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, smart city, etc. The functions of the terminal equipment can also be performed by modules in the terminal equipment (such as chips or modems), or can be performed by devices containing the functions of the terminal equipment.
前面描述了本申请实施例适用的通信系统,接下来介绍本申请实施例涉及的一些技术特征。The communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application has been described above. Next, some technical features involved in the embodiments of the present application will be introduced.
NR系统中,终端设备的上行传输通常因功率受限、上行链路频谱不够等原因导致基站的上行覆盖不足。为此,NR系统引入增补上行SUL技术,该技术通过将LTE系统的较低频段(如,700MHz、800MHz、1.8GHz、或2.1GHz等)对应的载波用于NR上行传输,可以提高基站的上行覆盖。即,当终端设备在NR系统的频段(如2.6GHz等)传输UL数据时,该终端设备可以根据信道状态等在LTE系统的这些较低频段中使用载波传输该UL数据。目前,4.9GHz等新频段可提供更高带宽的频谱资源,存在被用于NR系统以提高基站的上行覆盖的前景。其中,该LTE系统的较低频段记为SUL 1,NR系统的频段记为NUL,4.9GHz等新频段记为SUL 2。In NR systems, the uplink transmission of terminal equipment usually results in insufficient uplink coverage of the base station due to power limitations, insufficient uplink spectrum and other reasons. To this end, the NR system introduces supplementary uplink SUL technology. This technology can improve the uplink performance of the base station by using the carrier corresponding to the lower frequency band of the LTE system (such as 700MHz, 800MHz, 1.8GHz, or 2.1GHz, etc.) for NR uplink transmission. cover. That is, when the terminal device transmits UL data in the frequency band of the NR system (such as 2.6GHz, etc.), the terminal device can use the carrier to transmit the UL data in these lower frequency bands of the LTE system according to the channel status and so on. Currently, new frequency bands such as 4.9GHz can provide higher bandwidth spectrum resources and have the prospect of being used in NR systems to improve the uplink coverage of base stations. Among them, the lower frequency band of the LTE system is marked as SUL 1, the frequency band of the NR system is marked as NUL, and new frequency bands such as 4.9GHz are marked as SUL 2.
一方面,随着用户需求的日益增加以及新频段(如4.9GHz)的使用,终端设备可以支持两个或两个以上的射频链路的并行传输,这意味着终端设备可以在三个或三个以上的载波间进行载波切换。例如,在时隙1中,终端设备通过载波1进行上行传输,在时隙1的下一个时隙中,终端设备可以切换载波,通过载波2和载波3进行上行传输。又例如,在时隙1中,终端设备通过载波2和载波3进行上行传输,在时隙1的下一个时隙中,终端设备可以切换载波,通过载波1进行上行传输。再例如,在时隙1中,终端设备通过载波1和载波4进行上行传输,在时隙1的下一个时隙中,终端设备可以切换载波,通过载波2和载波3进行上行传输。但如何实现终端设备在三个载波或四个载波间的载波切换,目前尚未有相应的技术方案。On the one hand, with the increasing needs of users and the use of new frequency bands (such as 4.9GHz), terminal equipment can support parallel transmission of two or more radio frequency links, which means that terminal equipment can operate on three or more radio frequency links. Carrier switching is performed between more than one carrier. For example, in time slot 1, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1. In the next time slot of time slot 1, the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3. For another example, in time slot 1, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3. In the next time slot of time slot 1, the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 1. For another example, in time slot 1, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 4. In the next time slot of time slot 1, the terminal device can switch carriers and perform uplink transmission through carrier 2 and carrier 3. However, there is currently no corresponding technical solution for how to implement carrier switching of terminal equipment between three carriers or four carriers.
另一方面,目前终端设备支持在两个载波间的动态切换,该两个载波对应的TA相同,该两个载波切换过程中的切换间隔与第一值相等,未考虑这两个载波对应的两个TA的差值。而终端设备在三个载波(或四个载波)间进行切换的场景下,该三个载波(或四个载波)的频率可属于多个频段,那么提供该三个载波(或四个载波)的网络设备的数量可以为多个,这些网络设备可以是共站址(即共址部署),也可以是异站址(即异址部署)。在这些网络设备异站址的情况下,该三个载波(或四个载波)对应的三个TA(或四个TA)可以不同。On the other hand, current terminal equipment supports dynamic switching between two carriers. The two carriers correspond to the same TA. The switching interval during the switching process of the two carriers is equal to the first value. The corresponding TA of the two carriers is not considered. The difference between the two TAs. In the scenario where the terminal equipment switches between three carriers (or four carriers), the frequencies of the three carriers (or four carriers) may belong to multiple frequency bands, then the three carriers (or four carriers) are provided The number of network devices can be multiple, and these network devices can be at the same site (ie, co-site deployment) or at different sites (ie, different site deployment). In the case where these network devices have different addresses, the three TAs (or four TAs) corresponding to the three carriers (or four carriers) may be different.
以网络设备1提供SUL 2,网络设备2提供SUL 1和NUL为例,网络设备1和网络设备2可以共站址(即,网络设备1和网络设备2共址部署),如图2A所示;或者,网络设备1和网络设备2也可以是异站址(即,网络设备1和网络设备2异址部署),如图2B所示。在图2A的场景下,网络设备1和网络设备2是异站址,终端设备与网络设备1之间的通信距离和终端设备与网络设备2之间的通信距离相同,则终端设备与网络设备1之间的TA与终端设备与网络设备2之间的TA也相同。在图2B的场景下,网络设备1和网络设备2是异站址,终端设备与网络设备1之间的通信距离和终端设备与网络设备2之间的通信距离不同,则该终端设备与网络设备1之间的TA与终端设备与网络设备2之间的TA也不同。应理解的是,用于提供SUL 1的网络设备和用于提供NUL的网络设备可以是共站址,也可以是异站址,但为了便于描述,本申请实施例以用于提供SUL 1的网络设备和用于提供NUL的网络设备是共站址为例。Taking network device 1 to provide SUL 2 and network device 2 to provide SUL 1 and NUL as an example, network device 1 and network device 2 can share the same site (i.e., network device 1 and network device 2 are deployed at the same site), as shown in Figure 2A ; Alternatively, network device 1 and network device 2 may also be at different sites (that is, network device 1 and network device 2 are deployed at different sites), as shown in Figure 2B. In the scenario of Figure 2A, network device 1 and network device 2 are at different sites, and the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 1 is the same as the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 2, then the terminal device and the network device The TA between 1 and the TA between the terminal device and network device 2 is also the same. In the scenario of Figure 2B, network device 1 and network device 2 are at different sites, and the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 1 is different from the communication distance between the terminal device and network device 2, then the terminal device and the network The TA between device 1 and the TA between the terminal device and network device 2 are also different. It should be understood that the network equipment used to provide SUL 1 and the network equipment used to provide NUL may be at the same site or at different sites. However, for the convenience of description, the embodiment of this application uses the network equipment used to provide SUL 1. For example, the network device and the network device used to provide NUL share the same site address.
接下来,结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的载波切换方法。Next, the carrier switching method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be introduced with reference to the accompanying drawings.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例涉及终端设备在三个或三个以上的载波间的载波切换。为了便于描述,后文中以终端设备在三个载波间的载波切换和在四个载波间的载波切换为例。本申请实施例中切换前的载波所在的频段与切换后的载波所在的频段可以是不同的频段,也可以是相同的频段,后文中以切换前的载波所在的频段与切换后的载波所在的频段是不同的频段为例。在切换前的载波所在的频段与切换后的载波所在的频段是不同的频段的情况下,本申请实施例中终端设备在多个载波间切换也可以称为终端设备在多个频段间切换。另外,切换前的两个载波所在的两个频段可以是相同的频段,也可以是不同的频段。切换后的两个载波所在的两个频段也可以是相同的频段,还可以是不同的频段。It should be noted that this embodiment of the present application involves carrier switching of a terminal device between three or more carriers. For the convenience of description, the carrier switching of the terminal device among three carriers and the carrier switching among four carriers are taken as examples in the following. In the embodiment of the present application, the frequency band where the carrier before switching is located and the frequency band where the carrier is after switching can be different frequency bands, or they can be the same frequency band. In the following, the frequency band where the carrier before switching is located and the frequency band where the carrier is after switching are used. The frequency bands are different frequency bands for example. When the frequency band where the carrier before switching is located is different from the frequency band where the carrier is after switching, the terminal device switching between multiple carriers in the embodiment of the present application may also be called the terminal device switching between multiple frequency bands. In addition, the two frequency bands where the two carriers before switching are located may be the same frequency band or may be different frequency bands. The two frequency bands where the two carriers are located after switching may be the same frequency band or different frequency bands.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例的终端设备可以支持两个或两个以上的射频链路的并行传输。为了便于理解,后文中以终端设备支持两个射频链路的并行传输为例。另外,本申请的各个实施例所提供的方法均可应用于图1、图2A或图2B所示的通信系统。本申请的各个实施例所涉及的终端设备可以为图1中120a-120j中任一项所示的终端设备,或者为图2A中的UE1或UE2,或者为图2B中的UE1或UE2。本申请的各个实施例所涉及的网络设备可以为图1中110a或110b所示的网络设备,或者为图2A中的网络设备1或网络设备2,或者为图2B中的网络设备1或网络设备2。It should be noted that the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application can support parallel transmission of two or more radio frequency links. For ease of understanding, the following article takes the terminal device supporting parallel transmission of two radio frequency links as an example. In addition, the methods provided by various embodiments of the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in Figure 1, Figure 2A or Figure 2B. The terminal equipment involved in various embodiments of the present application may be the terminal equipment shown in any one of 120a-120j in Figure 1, or UE1 or UE2 in Figure 2A, or UE1 or UE2 in Figure 2B. The network device involved in various embodiments of the present application may be the network device shown as 110a or 110b in Figure 1, or the network device 1 or network device 2 in Figure 2A, or the network device 1 or the network in Figure 2B Device 2.
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种载波切换方法的流程示意图。如图3所示,该方法流程可以包括如下内容。 Figure 3 is a schematic flowchart of a carrier switching method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the method flow may include the following content.
S301:网络设备为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA。或者网络设备为终端设备配置第一TAG和第二TAG。S301: The network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device. Or the network device configures the first TAG and the second TAG for the terminal device.
示例性的,第一TA(可记为TA1)可以是终端设备与网络设备A进行通信时的TA。第二TA(可记为TA2)可以是终端设备与网络设备B进行通信时的TA。第一TAG可以是终端设备与网络设备A进行通信时的TA所属的TAG。第二TAG可以是终端设备与网络设备B进行通信时的TA所属的TAG。该第一TA与第二TA可以相同,也可以不同,后文以第一TA与第二TA不同为例进行介绍。其中,第一TA属于第一TAG,或者第一TA是第一TAG对应的TA值。第二TA属于第二TAG,或者第二TA是第二TAG对应的TA值。有关TA、TAG的相关描述请参考术语解释部分,此处不再赘述。For example, the first TA (can be recorded as TA1) may be the TA when the terminal device communicates with the network device A. The second TA (can be recorded as TA2) may be the TA when the terminal device communicates with network device B. The first TAG may be the TAG to which TA belongs when the terminal device communicates with network device A. The second TAG may be the TAG to which TA belongs when the terminal device communicates with network device B. The first TA and the second TA may be the same or different. The following description takes the first TA and the second TA as being different as an example. Among them, the first TA belongs to the first TAG, or the first TA is the TA value corresponding to the first TAG. The second TA belongs to the second TAG, or the second TA is the TA value corresponding to the second TAG. For relevant descriptions of TA and TAG, please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
其中,该网络设备A可以是图2A或图2B所示的网络设备1,相应的网络设备B可以是图2A或图2B所示的网络设备2,在此情况下,第一TA大于第二TA,第一TAG中的TA大于第二TAG中的TA;或者,该网络设备A也可以是图2A或图2B所示的网络设备2,相应的网络设备B可以是图2A或图2B所示的网络设备1,在此情况下,第一TA小于第二TA,第一TAG中的TA大于第二TAG中的TA。Wherein, the network device A may be the network device 1 shown in FIG. 2A or FIG. 2B, and the corresponding network device B may be the network device 2 shown in FIG. 2A or FIG. 2B. In this case, the first TA is larger than the second TA. TA, the TA in the first TAG is greater than the TA in the second TAG; alternatively, the network device A can also be the network device 2 shown in Figure 2A or Figure 2B, and the corresponding network device B can be the network device B shown in Figure 2A or Figure 2B. In the network device 1 shown, in this case, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the TA in the first TAG is larger than the TA in the second TAG.
需要说明的是,S301中涉及的网络设备(即为终端设备配置第一TA(或第一TAG)和第二TA(或第二TAG)的网络设备)可以是网络设备A,也可以是网络设备B,还可以是除了网络设备A和网络设备B之外的网络设备,本申请实施例不作限定。在不作特殊是说明的情况下,后文以S301中涉及的网络设备是网络设备A或是网络设备B为例。It should be noted that the network device involved in S301 (that is, the network device that configures the first TA (or first TAG) and the second TA (or second TAG) for the terminal device) may be network device A, or may be network device A. Device B may also be a network device other than network device A and network device B, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application. Without special explanation, the following article will take as an example whether the network device involved in S301 is network device A or network device B.
需要说明的是,网络设备为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA,可以理解为网络设备确定第一TA和第二TA;或者,也可以理解为网络设备确定第一TA和第二TA,并向终端设备发送该第一TA和第二TA。若网络设备为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA理解为网络设备确定第一TA和第二TA,那么在确定出第一TA和第二TA之后,网络设备还可以向终端设备发送该第一TA和第二TA。类似的,网络设备为终端设备配置第一TAG和第二TAG,可以理解为网络设备确定第一TAG和第二TAG;或者,也可以理解为网络设备确定第一TAG和第二TAG,并向终端设备发送该第一TAG和第二TAG。若网络设备为终端设备配置第一TAG和第二TAG理解为网络设备确定第一TAG和第二TAG,那么在确定出第一TAG和第二TAG之后,网络设备还可以向终端设备发送该第一TAG和第二TAG。图3中以网络设备为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA为网络设备确定第一TA和第二TA并向终端设备发送该第一TA和该第二TA为例。It should be noted that when the network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, it can be understood that the network device determines the first TA and the second TA; or, it can also be understood that the network device determines the first TA and the second TA, and sends the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device. If the network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, it is understood that the network device determines the first TA and the second TA, then after determining the first TA and the second TA, the network device can also send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device. The first TA and the second TA. Similarly, when the network device configures the first TAG and the second TAG for the terminal device, it can be understood that the network device determines the first TAG and the second TAG; or it can also be understood that the network device determines the first TAG and the second TAG and sends the information to the terminal device. The terminal device sends the first TAG and the second TAG. If the network device configures the first TAG and the second TAG for the terminal device, it is understood that the network device determines the first TAG and the second TAG, then after determining the first TAG and the second TAG, the network device can also send the third TAG to the terminal device. One TAG and the second TAG. In Figure 3, it is taken as an example that the network device configures the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, determines the first TA and the second TA for the network device, and sends the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
以S301中涉及的网络设备是网络设备A,网络设备为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA为例,网络设备可以采用如下方式为终端设备配置第一TA:网络设备接收来自终端设备的第一前导码,根据该第一前导码确定第一TA,并向终端设备发送该第一TA,如通过第一随机接入响应消息向终端设备发送第一TA。进一步,网络设备可以采用如下方式为终端设备配置第二TA:网络设备接收来自网络设备B的第二前导码(或第二前导码的信号强度),根据第二前导码(或第二前导码的信号强度)确定第二TA,并向终端设备发送该第二TA,如网络设备通过第二随机接入响应消息向终端设备发送该第二TA;或者,网络设备接收来自网络设备B的第二TA,并向终端设备发送该第二TA,如网络设备通过第二随机接入响应消息向终端设备发送该第二TA。其中的第二前导码是终端设备发送给网络设备B的前导码。例如,网络设备B接收来自终端设备的第二前导码,可以向网络设备发送该第二前导码(或第二前导码的信号强度);或者,网络设备B接收来自终端设备的第二前导码,可以根据该第二前导码确定第二TA,并向网络设备发送该第二TA。应理解的是,本申请实施例对网络设备为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA的具体实现过程并不限定于此。Taking the network device involved in S301 as network device A and the network device configuring the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device as an example, the network device can configure the first TA for the terminal device in the following manner: the network device receives the third TA from the terminal device. A preamble, the first TA is determined based on the first preamble, and the first TA is sent to the terminal device, for example, the first TA is sent to the terminal device through a first random access response message. Further, the network device may configure the second TA for the terminal device in the following manner: the network device receives the second preamble (or the signal strength of the second preamble) from network device B, and according to the second preamble (or the signal strength of the second preamble) (signal strength) determines the second TA and sends the second TA to the terminal device. For example, the network device sends the second TA to the terminal device through a second random access response message; or the network device receives the second TA from network device B. Two TAs are sent to the terminal device. For example, the network device sends the second TA to the terminal device through a second random access response message. The second preamble is the preamble sent by the terminal device to network device B. For example, network device B receives the second preamble from the terminal device and can send the second preamble (or the signal strength of the second preamble) to the network device; or, network device B receives the second preamble from the terminal device. , the second TA can be determined according to the second preamble, and the second TA can be sent to the network device. It should be understood that the specific implementation process of the network device configuring the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
需要说明的是,网络设备可以先向终端设备发送第一TA,再向终端设备发送第二TA;或者也可以先向终端设备发送第二TA,再向终端设备发送第一TA;或者还可以同时向终端设备发送第一TA和第二TA。另外,第一随机接入响应消息与第二随机接入响应消息可以是同一个消息,也可以是不同的消息,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that the network device can first send the first TA to the terminal device, and then send the second TA to the terminal device; or it can also first send the second TA to the terminal device, and then send the first TA to the terminal device; or it can also Send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device at the same time. In addition, the first random access response message and the second random access response message may be the same message or different messages, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,网络设备为终端设备配置第一TAG和第二TAG的具体实现过程请参考网络设备为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA的相关内容,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that for the specific implementation process of the network device configuring the first TAG and the second TAG for the terminal device, please refer to the related content of the network device configuring the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, which will not be described again here.
S302:终端设备向网络设备发送第二消息,相应的,网络设备接收第二消息。S302: The terminal device sends the second message to the network device, and accordingly, the network device receives the second message.
S302为可选步骤,图3中用虚线表示。该第二消息包括终端设备的能力信息。该能力信息可以包括如下信息中的一种或多种。 S302 is an optional step, represented by a dotted line in Figure 3 . The second message includes capability information of the terminal device. The capability information may include one or more of the following information.
信息1,可用于指示终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在该两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,该两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整;或者,用于指示终端设备支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在该两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,该两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整。Information 1 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times. During the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the radio frequency link. Adjustment; or, used to indicate that the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times. During the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the radio frequency link. Adjustment.
终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在该两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,该两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整也可以理解为,终端设备是否支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,也可以理解为终端设备是否支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信。Whether the terminal equipment supports sending data on two carriers at different times, during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link, which can also be understood as, Whether the terminal equipment supports communication through radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link before the handover of a radio frequency link is completed; or, it can also be understood as whether the terminal equipment supports communication through radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link during the handover process of a radio frequency link. The one radio frequency link is external to the radio frequency link for communication.
例如,终端设备已完成射频链路1的调整,未完成射频链路2的调整,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,那么终端设备可以在调整射频链路2的同时通过已调整完成的射频链路1进行通信。又例如,终端设备已完成射频链路1的调整,未完成射频链路2的调整,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,那么终端设备不可以在调整射频链路2的同时通过已调整完成的射频链路1进行通信,而是需要等待射频链路2调整完成,并在完成射频链路2的调整后可以通过射频链路1进行通信。For example, the terminal equipment has completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 1 but has not completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 2. If the information 1 indicates that the terminal equipment supports the use of radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, channel to communicate, then the terminal device can communicate through the adjusted radio frequency link 1 while adjusting radio frequency link 2. For another example, the terminal equipment has completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 1 but has not completed the adjustment of radio frequency link 2. If the information 1 indicates that the terminal equipment does not support switching through a radio frequency link other than that one before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed. RF link to communicate, then the terminal device cannot communicate through the adjusted RF link 1 while adjusting RF link 2. Instead, it needs to wait for the adjustment of RF link 2 to be completed, and complete the adjustment of RF link 2. Adjusted to allow communication via RF Link 1.
需要说明的是,终端设备通过射频链路进行通信,可理解为终端设备通过该射频链路进行数据、控制信息等信息的传输,后文以终端设备通过射频链路进行数据传输为例。It should be noted that the terminal device communicates through the radio frequency link, which can be understood as the terminal device transmits data, control information and other information through the radio frequency link. The following article takes the terminal device transmitting data through the radio frequency link as an example.
信息2,可用于指示终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,是否支持或是否需要等待除了该一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过该一条射频链路进行通信;或者,用于指示终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,支持或需要等待除了该一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过该一条射频链路进行通信。以射频链路1和射频链路2为例,若信息2指示终端设备在一个射频链路切换完成之后,需要等待除了该第一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路完成切换之后通过该一条射频链路进行通信,那么在射频链路1切换完成,射频链路2未切换完成的情况,终端设备需要在射频链路2切换完成后通过该射频链路1进行通信。若信息2指示终端设备在一个射频链路切换完成之后,不需要等待除了该第一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路完成切换之后通过该一条射频链路进行通信,那么在射频链路1切换完成,射频链路2未切换完成的情况下,终端设备可以通过该射频链路1进行通信,无需等待射频链路2完成切换之后才通过该射频链路1进行通信。Information 2 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports or needs to wait for communication through the radio frequency link after the switching of other radio frequency links other than the radio frequency link is completed after the switching of the radio frequency link is completed; or, It is used to instruct the terminal device to support or need to wait for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link to communicate through the one radio frequency link after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed. Taking RF link 1 and RF link 2 as an example, if information 2 indicates that the terminal device needs to wait for other RF links except the first RF link to complete the switch after completing the switch, then pass the If one radio frequency link is used for communication, then when the handover of radio frequency link 1 is completed but the handover of radio frequency link 2 is not completed, the terminal device needs to communicate through radio frequency link 1 after the handover of radio frequency link 2 is completed. If information 2 indicates that the terminal device does not need to wait for other radio frequency links except the first radio frequency link to complete the switching before communicating through the radio frequency link, then the radio frequency link 1. When the switching of RF link 2 is completed but the switching of radio frequency link 2 is not completed, the terminal device can communicate through the radio frequency link 1. There is no need to wait for the completion of the switching of radio frequency link 2 before communicating through the radio frequency link 1.
信息3,可用于指示终端设备是否支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换;或者,指示终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换。例如,终端设备是否支持在第一TA对应的载波和第二TA对应的载波之间进行载波切换。在本实施例中,以终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换为例。其中,终端设备是否支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换可替换为终端设备是否支持在不同TAG对应的多个载波间进行切换。Information 3 can be used to indicate whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs; or, to indicate whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs. For example, whether the terminal device supports carrier switching between the carrier corresponding to the first TA and the carrier corresponding to the second TA. In this embodiment, it is taken as an example that the terminal device supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs. Among them, whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs can be replaced by whether the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAGs.
可选的,该信息3还可以用于指示终端设备是否支持在同一时间单元并行发送的上行传输的载波的TA不同。例如,信息3指示终端设备支持在同一时间单元并行发送的上行传输的载波的TA不同,那么在终端设备通过载波1和载波2进行并行传输的情况下,该载波1对应的TA与载波2对应的TA不同。又例如,信息3指示终端设备不支持在同一时间单元并行发送的上行传输的载波的TA不同,那么在终端设备通过载波1和载波2进行并行传输的情况下,该载波1对应的TA与载波2对应的TA相同。Optionally, this information 3 can also be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports different TAs of uplink transmission carriers sent in parallel at the same time unit. For example, information 3 indicates that the terminal device supports uplink transmissions that are sent in parallel at the same time unit. The carriers have different TAs. Then, when the terminal device performs parallel transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 2, the TA corresponding to carrier 1 corresponds to the carrier 2. The TA is different. For another example, information 3 indicates that the terminal equipment does not support uplink transmissions sent in parallel at the same time unit. The carriers have different TAs. Then, when the terminal equipment performs parallel transmission through carrier 1 and carrier 2, the TA corresponding to carrier 1 is different from the carrier. 2 corresponds to the same TA.
通过上述信息3,在多个载波切换的过程中能够考虑不支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换的具有较低能力的终端设备,也可能考虑支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换的具有较高能力的终端设备,能够提高兼容性和系统频谱利用率。Through the above information 3, in the process of multiple carrier switching, it is possible to consider terminal equipment with lower capabilities that do not support switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs, or to support switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs. Terminal equipment with higher capabilities for handover can improve compatibility and system spectrum utilization.
信息4,可用于指示终端设备是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输;或者,用于指示终端设备支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输。例如,该信息4可用于指示终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输。例如,具有较低芯片的终端设备不支持根据该第三值在多个载波上并行传输;具有较高芯片的终端设备支持根据该第三值在多个载波上并行传输。其中的第三值的描述请参考术语解释部分,此处不再赘述。Information 4 may be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value; or, it may be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value. For example, this information 4 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value when switching between multiple frequency bands. For example, a terminal device with a lower chip does not support parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value; a terminal device with a higher chip supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to the third value. For the description of the third value, please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
相应地,网络设备在进行动态调度时,除了根据调度时延,还要根据状态转换时延来指示动态切换。当在不同频带之间的载波进行切换时,射频链路需要先加载该频带相关的一些参数,因为该加载所引入的时间称之为状态转换时延。其中的调度时延为从接收或检测到下行控制信息(downlink control  information,DCI)到进行上行发送数据之前的时长。Correspondingly, when the network device performs dynamic scheduling, in addition to the scheduling delay, it also needs to indicate dynamic switching based on the state transition delay. When switching carriers between different frequency bands, the radio frequency link needs to load some parameters related to the frequency band first, because the time introduced by this loading is called state transition delay. The scheduling delay is the time from receiving or detecting downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) until the uplink data is sent.
可选的,状态转换时延可以为N与第一状态转换值(如记为Tstate_transfer_1)的乘积,其中Tstate_transfer_1为300us,400us或500us等,N为正整数。可选的,状态转换时延还可以为第二状态转换值(如记为Tstate_transfer_2),其中Tstate_transfer_2为500us,1000us或1500us等。终端设备可以向网络设备发送状态转换时延。网络设备在接收到该状态转换时延后,需要在调度时延K2的基础上增加该状态转换时延,作为新的上行调度时延。Optionally, the state transition delay can be the product of N and the first state transition value (for example, recorded as Tstate_transfer_1), where Tstate_transfer_1 is 300us, 400us, or 500us, etc., and N is a positive integer. Optionally, the state transition delay can also be the second state transition value (for example, recorded as Tstate_transfer_2), where Tstate_transfer_2 is 500us, 1000us or 1500us, etc. The terminal device can send the state transition delay to the network device. After receiving the state transition delay, the network device needs to add the state transition delay to the scheduling delay K2 as the new uplink scheduling delay.
信息5,可用于指示终端设备是否支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段;或者,用于指示终端设备支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段。其中,第一频段是载波切换前的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换前的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段。第二频段是载波切换后的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换后的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段。其中,第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段,可理解为第一频段与第二频段相同,或者也可以理解为第一频段中的部分频段和第二频段中的部分或全部频段重叠(或相同)。或者还可以理解为第一频段中的全部频段和第二频段中的部分或全部频段重叠(或相同)。其中的第一频段可替换为第一频段组,第二频段可替换为第二频段组。Information 5 may be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports a common frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band; or, it may be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports a common frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band. The first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located. The second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier is located after carrier switching, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers are located after carrier switching. Wherein, there is a common frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, which can be understood as the first frequency band and the second frequency band are the same, or it can also be understood as part of the first frequency band and part or all of the second frequency band. Overlapping (or identical). Or it can also be understood that all the frequency bands in the first frequency band overlap (or are the same) with part or all of the frequency bands in the second frequency band. The first frequency band can be replaced with a first frequency band group, and the second frequency band can be replaced with a second frequency band group.
示例性的,终端设备在第一时间单元进行数据传输时使用的一个或多个频段与在第二时间单元进行数据传输时使用的一个或多个频段中存在一个或多个共同的频段,该第一时间单元与第二时间单元是连续的两个时间单元。例如,终端设备在第一时隙内通过载波1和载波4进行传输,载波1所在的频段为频段A,载波4所在的频段为频段B;在第二时隙内终端设备通过载波2和载波3进行传输,载波2所在的频段为频段B,载波3所在的频段为频段C。其中,终端设备在第一时隙和第二时隙内都使用频段B的载波进行数据传输。Exemplarily, there are one or more common frequency bands among the one or more frequency bands used by the terminal device when transmitting data in the first time unit and the one or more frequency bands used when transmitting data in the second time unit. The first time unit and the second time unit are two consecutive time units. For example, the terminal equipment transmits through carrier 1 and carrier 4 in the first time slot, the frequency band where carrier 1 is located is frequency band A, and the frequency band where carrier 4 is located is frequency band B; in the second time slot, the terminal equipment transmits through carrier 2 and carrier 4. 3 for transmission, the frequency band where carrier 2 is located is frequency band B, and the frequency band where carrier 3 is located is frequency band C. The terminal equipment uses the carrier of frequency band B for data transmission in both the first time slot and the second time slot.
信息6,可用于指示终端设备是否支持被配置回退频段(可记为anchor band);或者,用于指示终端设备支持被配置回退频段。Information 6 can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the configured fallback frequency band (can be recorded as anchor band); or, it can be used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the configured fallback frequency band.
该回退频段是多个频段间切换时定义的一个频段。例如,终端设备向网络设备发送信息6,该信息6指示终端设备支持被配置回退频段;相应的,网络设备可以根据信息6为终端设备配置回退频段,如为终端设备配置回退频段为载波1所在的频段(如记为频段A)。进一步,当终端设备从载波4切换至载波3时,终端设备可以先将应用于载波4的射频链路所在的频段切换至频段A,再将该射频链路从频段A切换至载波3所在的频段。The fallback frequency band is a frequency band defined when switching between multiple frequency bands. For example, the terminal device sends information 6 to the network device. The information 6 indicates that the terminal device supports the configured fallback frequency band; accordingly, the network device can configure the fallback frequency band for the terminal device according to the information 6. For example, configuring the fallback frequency band for the terminal device is The frequency band where carrier 1 is located (for example, recorded as frequency band A). Furthermore, when the terminal equipment switches from carrier 4 to carrier 3, the terminal equipment can first switch the frequency band where the radio frequency link applied to carrier 4 is located to frequency band A, and then switch the radio frequency link from frequency band A to the frequency band where carrier 3 is located. frequency band.
信息7,可用于指示终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持响应探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)载波切换(carrier switching);或者,用于指示终端设备在多个频段间切换时,支持响应SRS carrier switching;或者,用于指示终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持为SRS carrier switching提供专用的存储空间;或者,用于指示终端设备在多个频段间切换时,支持为SRS carrier switching提供专用的存储空间。其中,该存储空间为射频相关的存储空间。Information 7 can be used to indicate whether the terminal equipment supports carrier switching (carrier switching) in response to the sounding reference signal (SRS) when switching between multiple frequency bands; or, it can be used to indicate when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands. , supports responding to SRS carrier switching; or, is used to instruct the terminal device to support providing dedicated storage space for SRS carrier switching when switching between multiple frequency bands; or is used to instruct the terminal device to support when switching between multiple frequency bands. Provide dedicated storage space for SRS carrier switching. Among them, the storage space is a radio frequency-related storage space.
SRS carrier switching机制中,允许SRS在非上行载波中切换以获取下行载波的信道状况。终端设备的硬件能力通常是固定的,存储空间能承载多少也是预先就规定好的。若信息7指示终端设备在多个频段间切换时,支持响应SRS carrier switching,意味着终端设备可以为SRS carrier switching提供专用的存储空间,使得终端设备在一个时隙内进行多个频段间上行传输的切换时,进行SRS carrier switching。若信息7指示终端设备在多个频段间切换时,不支持响应SRS carrier switching,意味着终端设备不能在一个时隙内进行多个频段间上行传输的切换时,进行SRS carrier switching。在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以向网络设备发送信息7,这样网络设备根据信息7可以指示终端设备切换频段,以保证终端设备兼顾SRS carrier switching和多个频段间上行传输的切换。In the SRS carrier switching mechanism, SRS is allowed to switch among non-uplink carriers to obtain the channel conditions of the downlink carrier. The hardware capabilities of terminal devices are usually fixed, and the amount of storage space that can be carried is also predetermined. If information 7 indicates that the terminal device supports responding to SRS carrier switching when switching between multiple frequency bands, it means that the terminal device can provide dedicated storage space for SRS carrier switching, allowing the terminal device to perform uplink transmission between multiple frequency bands in one time slot. When switching, perform SRS carrier switching. If information 7 indicates that the terminal device does not support SRS carrier switching when switching between multiple frequency bands, it means that the terminal device cannot perform SRS carrier switching when switching uplink transmission between multiple frequency bands within a time slot. In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device can send information 7 to the network device, so that the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch frequency bands based on the information 7 to ensure that the terminal device takes into account SRS carrier switching and uplink transmission switching between multiple frequency bands.
需要说明的是,上述信息1、信息2、信息3、信息4、信息5、信息6以及信息7中的“支持”可替换为“能够(或能)”、“期望”或“需要”等术语;相应的,“是否支持”可替换为“是否能够(或是否能)”、“是否期望”或“是否需要”等术语。以及,上述信息4、信息5、信息6以及信息7中的“频段”可替换为“频带”。It should be noted that the "support" in the above information 1, information 2, information 3, information 4, information 5, information 6 and information 7 can be replaced by "can (or can)", "expect" or "need", etc. Terminology; accordingly, "whether it is supported" can be replaced by terms such as "whether it is possible (or whether it is possible)", "whether it is expected" or "whether it is needed". Also, the "frequency band" in the above-mentioned information 4, information 5, information 6 and information 7 can be replaced with "frequency band".
需要说明的是,时间单元可以为时隙,子帧,迷你时隙,或迷你子帧等,本申请实施例不作限定。It should be noted that the time unit may be a time slot, a subframe, a mini-slot, a mini-subframe, etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
S303:网络设备向终端设备发送第一消息,相应的,终端设备接收第一消息。S303: The network device sends the first message to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device receives the first message.
网络设备可以向终端设备发送第一消息,该第一消息例如可以是无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)或MAC消息或DCI等,本申请实施例对第一消息的具体实现形式不作限定。示例性的,网络设备可以确定终端设备切换载波,以及向终端设备发送第一消息。例如,网络设备可以周期性地或 非周期性地确定终端设备是否需要切换载波。例如,网络设备可以根据测量报告信息,确定终端设是否需要切换载波。其中,该测量报告信息可以包括信道状态,和/或信号强度等信息,本申请实施例对测量报告信息的内容不作限定。例如,当前信道状态差,和/或信号强度差,网络设备可以确定终端设备切换载波。又例如,当前信道状态较好,且当前信号强度较好,网络设备可以确定终端设备不切换载波。在本实施例中以网络设备确定终端设备切换载波为例。另外,该测量报告信息可以是网络设备测量得到的信息,或者也可以是终端设备测量得到的信息,本申请实施例不作限定。应理解的是,本申请实施例对网络设备确定终端设备切换载波的具体实现方式不作限定。The network device may send a first message to the terminal device. The first message may be, for example, radio resource control (RRC), MAC message, DCI, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation form of the first message. For example, the network device may determine that the terminal device switches carriers, and send the first message to the terminal device. For example, a network device can periodically or Aperiodically determine whether the terminal device needs to switch carriers. For example, the network device can determine whether the terminal device needs to switch carriers based on the measurement report information. The measurement report information may include information such as channel status and/or signal strength. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the content of the measurement report information. For example, if the current channel status is poor and/or the signal strength is poor, the network device may determine that the terminal device switches the carrier. For another example, if the current channel status is good and the current signal strength is good, the network device can determine that the terminal device does not switch carriers. In this embodiment, the network device determines that the terminal device switches carriers as an example. In addition, the measurement report information may be information measured by the network device, or may be information measured by the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manner in which the network device determines that the terminal device switches carriers.
其中,网络设备可以根据测量报告信息确定终端设备是否切换载波。在另一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备接收来自终端设备的第二消息,可以根据该第二消息确定终端设备是否切换载波,或者根据该第二消息和测量报告信息确定终端设备是否切换载波。应理解的是,本申请实施例对网络设备确定终端设备是否切换载波的具体实现方式并不限定于此。有关第二消息的描述请参考S302的相关内容,此处不再赘述。The network device may determine whether the terminal device switches carriers based on the measurement report information. In another possible implementation, the network device receives a second message from the terminal device, and can determine whether the terminal device switches carriers based on the second message, or determines whether the terminal device switches carriers based on the second message and the measurement report information. . It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation manner in which the network device determines whether the terminal device switches carriers. For the description of the second message, please refer to the relevant content of S302, which will not be described again here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备向网络设备发送第二消息,相应的,网络设备接收第二消息。可选的,网络设备可以根据第二消息向终端设备发送第一消息。有关第二消息的描述请参考S302的相关内容,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation, the terminal device sends the second message to the network device, and accordingly, the network device receives the second message. Optionally, the network device may send the first message to the terminal device according to the second message. For the description of the second message, please refer to the relevant content of S302, which will not be described again here.
在本申请实施例中,该第一消息可使得(或触发)终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。第一载波集包括第一载波(可记为C1),第二载波集包括第二载波(可记为C2)和第三载波(可记为C3);或者,第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,第二载波集包括第一载波;或者,第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波(可记为C4),第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波。In this embodiment of the present application, the first message may cause (or trigger) the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set. The first carrier set includes a first carrier (which may be noted as C1), and the second carrier set includes a second carrier (which may be noted as C2) and a third carrier (which may be noted as C3); or, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes the first carrier; or, the first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier (can be recorded as C4), and the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier.
其中,第一载波对应于第一TA,第二载波对应于第二TA,第三载波对应于第一TA,第四载波对应于第二TA。即,第一载波与第三载波对应于同一个TA,第二载波与第四载波对应于同一个TA。该第一TA与第二TA可以相同,也可以不同,本申请实施例中对此不作限定。为了便于理解本申请实施例,后文以第一TA与第二TA不同为例进行介绍。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA. That is, the first carrier and the third carrier correspond to the same TA, and the second carrier and the fourth carrier correspond to the same TA. The first TA and the second TA may be the same or different, and this is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following description takes the first TA and the second TA as different examples.
或者,该第一载波对应于第一TAG,第二载波对应于第二TAG,第三载波对应于第一TAG。第四载波对应于第二TAG。即,第一载波与第三载波对应于同一个TAG,第二载波与第四载波对应于同一个TAG。其中,第一TA属于第一TAG,或者第一TA是第一TAG对应的TA值。第二TA属于第二TAG,或者第二TA是第二TAG对应的TA值。Alternatively, the first carrier corresponds to the first TAG, the second carrier corresponds to the second TAG, and the third carrier corresponds to the first TAG. The fourth carrier corresponds to the second TAG. That is, the first carrier and the third carrier correspond to the same TAG, and the second carrier and the fourth carrier correspond to the same TAG. Among them, the first TA belongs to the first TAG, or the first TA is the TA value corresponding to the first TAG. The second TA belongs to the second TAG, or the second TA is the TA value corresponding to the second TAG.
需要说明的是,第一载波集包括第一载波,可理解为该第一载波集至少包括第一载波。即,该第一载波集除了包括第一载波之外还可以包括至少一个其它载波,该其它载波对应的可以是第一TA,也可以是第二TA,还可以是除了第一TA和第二TA之外的其它TA,本申请实施例不作限定。第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,可理解为第二载波集至少包括第二载波和第三载波。即,该第二载波集除了包括第二载波和第三载波之外还可以包括至少一个其它载波,该其它载波对应的TA可以是第一TA,也可以是第二TA,还可以是除了第一TA和第二TA之外的其它TA,本申请实施例不作限定。It should be noted that the first carrier set includes the first carrier, which can be understood to mean that the first carrier set at least includes the first carrier. That is, in addition to the first carrier, the first carrier set may also include at least one other carrier. The other carrier may correspond to the first TA, the second TA, or may be in addition to the first TA and the second TA. TAs other than TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application. The second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, which may be understood to mean that the second carrier set at least includes the second carrier and the third carrier. That is, in addition to the second carrier and the third carrier, the second carrier set may also include at least one other carrier. The TA corresponding to the other carrier may be the first TA, the second TA, or the TA in addition to the third carrier. TAs other than the first TA and the second TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
或者,第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,可理解为第一载波集至少包括第二载波和第三载波。即,该第一载波集除了包括第二载波和第三载波之外还可以包括至少一个其它载波,该其它载波对应的TA可以是第一TA,也可以是第二TA,还可以是除了第一TA和第二TA之外的其它TA,本申请实施例不作限定。第二载波集包括第一载波,可理解为该第二载波集至少包括第一载波。即,该第二载波集除了包括第二载波之外还可以包括至少一个其它载波,该其它载波对应的可以是第一TA,也可以是第二TA,还可以是除了第一TA和第二TA之外的其它TA,本申请实施例不作限定。Alternatively, the first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, which may be understood to mean that the first carrier set at least includes the second carrier and the third carrier. That is, in addition to the second carrier and the third carrier, the first carrier set may also include at least one other carrier. The TA corresponding to the other carrier may be the first TA, the second TA, or the TA in addition to the third carrier. TAs other than the first TA and the second TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application. The second carrier set includes the first carrier, which may be understood to mean that the second carrier set at least includes the first carrier. That is, in addition to the second carrier, the second carrier set may also include at least one other carrier. The other carrier may correspond to the first TA, the second TA, or may be in addition to the first TA and the second TA. TAs other than TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
或者,第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,可理解为第一载波集至少包括第一载波和第四载波。即,该第一载波集除了包括第一载波和第四载波之外还可以包括至少一个其它载波,该其它载波对应的TA可以是第一TA,也可以是第二TA,还可以是除了第一TA和第二TA之外的其它TA,本申请实施例不作限定。第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波的描述请参考上述描述,此处不再赘述。Alternatively, the first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier, which may be understood to mean that the first carrier set at least includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier. That is, in addition to the first carrier and the fourth carrier, the first carrier set may also include at least one other carrier. The TA corresponding to the other carrier may be the first TA, the second TA, or other than the first TA. TAs other than the first TA and the second TA are not limited in the embodiments of this application. For a description of the second carrier set including the second carrier and the third carrier, please refer to the above description and will not be described again here.
需要说明的是,第一载波对应于第一TA,可理解为终端设备与网络设备之间通过第一载波进行通信时的TA是第一TA。第一载波对应于第一TAG,可理解为终端设备与网络设备之间通过第一载波进行通信时的TA属于第一TAG。类似的,第二载波对应于第二TA,可理解为终端设备与网络设备之间通过第二载波进行通信时的TA是第二TA。第二载波对应于第二TAG,可理解为终端设备与网络设备之间通过第二载波进行通信时的TA属于第二TAG。第三载波对应于第一TA,可理解为终端设备与网 络设备之间通过第三载波进行通信时的TA是第三TA。第三载波对应于第一TAG,可理解为终端设备与网络设备之间通过第三载波进行通信时的TA属于第一TAG。第四载波对应于第二TA,可理解为终端设备与网络设备之间通过第四载波进行通信时的TA是第二TA。第四载波对应于第二TAG,可理解为终端设备与网络设备之间通过第四载波进行通信时的TA属于第二TAG。It should be noted that the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the first carrier is the first TA. The first carrier corresponds to the first TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the first carrier belongs to the first TAG. Similarly, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the second carrier is the second TA. The second carrier corresponds to the second TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the second carrier belongs to the second TAG. The third carrier corresponds to the first TA, which can be understood as the connection between the terminal equipment and the network. The TA when network devices communicate through the third carrier is the third TA. The third carrier corresponds to the first TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the third carrier belongs to the first TAG. The fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the fourth carrier is the second TA. The fourth carrier corresponds to the second TAG, which can be understood to mean that the TA when the terminal device and the network device communicate through the fourth carrier belongs to the second TAG.
为了便于理解,本申请实施例以第一载波对应于第一TA,第二载波对应于第二TA,第三载波对应于第一TA,第四载波对应于第二TA为例进行描述。For ease of understanding, the embodiment of this application is described by taking the first carrier corresponding to the first TA, the second carrier corresponding to the second TA, the third carrier corresponding to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponding to the second TA as an example.
示例性的,第一消息可通过如下方式中的一项或多项,指示(或触发)终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。For example, the first message may instruct (or trigger) the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set through one or more of the following methods.
方式一:第一载波集包括第一载波,第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,第一消息可触发终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。具体的,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,或者第一消息指示(或包括)第一标识,或者第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波以及指示第一标识。Method 1: The first carrier set includes the first carrier, the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, and the first message can trigger the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set. Specifically, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, or the first message may indicate (or include) the first identifier, or the first message may indicate the terminal The device switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set and indicates the first identifier.
在本方式一中,终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可理解为终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波或第三载波;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波被激活,第二载波去激活和第三载波去激活的状态切换至第一载波去激活,第二载波被激活和第三载波被激活的状态;或者,可理解为终端设备从通过第一载波进行数据传输的状态切换至通过第二载波和第三载波进行数据传输的状态。In this method one, the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier or the third carrier; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier. is activated, the second carrier is deactivated, and the third carrier is deactivated, switching to a state where the first carrier is deactivated, the second carrier is activated, and the third carrier is activated; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the state of passing the first carrier to The state of data transmission is switched to the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier.
在本方式一中,终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波的第一射频链路对应的频率切换至(或调整到)第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的频率,以及将终端设备的第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中除了最小TA对应的载波之外的一个载波的频率;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波向第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换进行上行传输;或者,可理解为终端设备将第一射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波所在的频段(或频带),以及将第二射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中除了最小TA对应的载波之外的一个载波所在的频段(或频带)。In this method one, the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to (or adjusts to) the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the second carrier set, and switching the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link of the terminal device to the frequency of a carrier in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA; or, It can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches the frequency band (or frequency band) where the first radio frequency link is located to the second carrier. The frequency band (or frequency band) where the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the set is located, and switching the frequency band (or frequency band) where the second radio frequency link is located to the frequency band where a carrier other than the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA is located in the second carrier set ( or frequency band).
类似的,终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波的第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的频率,以及将终端设备的第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中除了最大TA对应的载波之外的一个载波的频率;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波向第二载波集中的最大TA对应载波切换进行上行传输;或者,可理解为终端设备将第一射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波所在的频段(或频带),以及将第二射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中除了最大TA对应的载波之外的一个载波所在的频段(或频带)。其中的频率可替换为频点。Similarly, when the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the second carrier set, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link applied to the first carrier to the maximum TA in the second carrier set. The frequency of the carrier corresponding to the TA, and switching the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link of the terminal equipment to the frequency of a carrier in the second carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the largest TA; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the first The carrier switches to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches the frequency band (or frequency band) where the first radio frequency link is located to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. frequency band (or frequency band), and switching the frequency band (or frequency band) where the second radio frequency link is located to the frequency band (or frequency band) where a carrier in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the largest TA is located. The frequency can be replaced by a frequency point.
需要说明的是,在本方式一中,第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,那么该第二载波集中除了最小TA对应的载波之外的一个载波可理解为该第二载波集中最大TA对应的载波。同理,该第二载波集中除了最大TA对应的载波之外的一个载波可理解为该第二载波集中最小TA对应的载波。It should be noted that in this method one, the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, then a carrier in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA can be understood as the largest carrier in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to TA. Similarly, a carrier in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the largest TA can be understood as the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例涉及的载波的频率可以理解为载波所在频段的频率。例如,第一载波的频率可理解为第一载波所在频段的频率。It should be noted that the frequency of the carrier involved in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the frequency of the frequency band in which the carrier is located. For example, the frequency of the first carrier can be understood as the frequency of the frequency band in which the first carrier is located.
作为一个示例,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波。例如,第一消息的取值可用于指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波。例如,第一消息的取值为00,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。又例如,第一消息的取值为01,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波。应理解的是,本申请实施例对第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波的具体实现方式并不限定于此。As an example, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. For example, the value of the first message may be used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. For example, the value of the first message is 00, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. For another example, the value of the first message is 01, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation of the first message instructing the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set.
作为一个示例,第一消息中的第一标识可以是第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,或者是第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA所归属的TAG的标识。为了便于理解,后文以第一标识是第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识为例进行描述。例如,第一标识是第二TA的标识。又例如,第一标识是第一TA的标识。As an example, the first identifier in the first message may be the identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set, or the identifier of a TAG to which a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set belongs. For ease of understanding, the following description takes an example in which the first identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set. For example, the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA. For another example, the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
作为又一个示例,第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波以及包括第一标识。例如,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,且该第一消息中的第一标识是第二TA的标识;或者,该第 一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,且该第一消息中的第一标识是第一TA的标识。又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,且该第一消息中的第一标识是第一TA的标识;或者,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,且该第一消息中的第一标识是第二TA的标识。As another example, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set and includes the first identifier. For example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is that of the second TA. identification; alternatively, the A message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is the identifier of the first TA. For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is the first TA. or, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first identifier in the first message is the identifier of the second TA.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还可以指示第一切换间隔(可记为GAP1)被配置的载波。该第一切换间隔可以是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长。通过该实现方式,终端设备根据该第一消息可以确定载波切换过程因调整射频链路等需要中断的载波。例如,第一消息可指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或指示该第一切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或指示该第一切换间隔中的第一部分(可记为GAP1_1)被配置在载波切换前的载波上以及该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分(可记为GAP1_2)被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。应理解的是,在本方式一中,载波切换前的载波为第一载波。In a possible implementation manner, the first message may also indicate the carrier for which the first switching interval (which may be recorded as GAP1) is configured. The first switching interval may be the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between the two carriers. Through this implementation, the terminal device can determine the carrier that needs to be interrupted due to adjustment of the radio frequency link or the like in the carrier switching process based on the first message. For example, the first message may indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, or indicate that the first switching interval The first part (can be recorded as GAP1_1) is configured on the carrier before carrier switching and the remaining part except the first part (can be recorded as GAP1_2) in the first switching interval is configured on the maximum TA of the second carrier set on the corresponding carrier. It should be understood that in this method one, the carrier before carrier switching is the first carrier.
例如,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上。For example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switch. .
例如,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。For example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to TA.
又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switching. superior.
又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA.
再例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,以及指示该第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier before carrier switching, the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的第一消息可以是一个消息,也可以是多个消息。相应的,该第一消息所指示的信息可以包含在一个消息中,也可以包含在多个消息中。例如,第一消息为两个消息,该两个消息中的一个消息可用于指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,另一个消息可用于指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上。It should be noted that the first message in the embodiment of this application may be one message or multiple messages. Correspondingly, the information indicated by the first message may be included in one message or in multiple messages. For example, the first message is two messages. One of the two messages can be used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the other message can be used to indicate the first switching interval. Configured on the carrier before carrier switching.
通过上述方式一,网络设备可通过TA的相关信息(如最大TA,或最小TA,或TA的标识)指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波或切换至第三载波。并且,网络设备还可以通过TA的相关信息指示载波切换过程中,第一切换间隔被配置的载波。Through the above method 1, the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier through TA related information (such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the TA identification). Furthermore, the network device may also indicate the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process through TA related information.
方式二:第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,第二载波集包括第一载波,第一消息可触发终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。具体的,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,或者第一消息指示(或包括)第二标识,或者第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波以及指示第二标识。Method 2: The first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, the second carrier set includes the first carrier, and the first message can trigger the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set. Specifically, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, or the first message may indicate (or include) the second identifier, or the first message may indicate the terminal The device switches from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier and indicates the second identifier.
在本方式二中,终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可理解为终端设备从第二载波或第三载波切换至第一载波;或者,可理解为终端设备从第二载波被激活,第三载波被激活和第一载波去激活的状态切换至第二载波去激活,第三载波去激活和第一载波被激活的状态;或者,可理解为终端设备从通过第二载波和第三载波进行数据传输的状态切换至通过第一载波进行数据传输的状态。In this second method, the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier; or, it can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the second carrier is activated, the third carrier is activated and the first carrier is deactivated, and the state switches to a state where the second carrier is deactivated, the third carrier is deactivated, and the first carrier is activated; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches from passing through the second carrier to The state of data transmission with the third carrier is switched to the state of data transmission with the first carrier.
在本方式二中,终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,以及关闭应用于第一载波集中除了最小TA对应的载波之外的载波的射频链路;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波向第一载波切换进行上行传输;或者,可理解为终端设备将第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第一载波所在的频段(或频带),以及关闭应用于第一载波集中除了最小TA对应的载波之外的载波的射频链路。In this second method, the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier. It can be understood that the terminal device will apply the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. Switch to the frequency of the first carrier, and close the radio frequency link applied to the carriers in the first carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA; alternatively, it can be understood that the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the The first carrier is switched for uplink transmission; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches the frequency band (or frequency band) of the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the frequency band (or frequency band) of the first carrier, and turning off radio frequency links applied to carriers in the first carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA.
类似的,终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,以及关闭该第一载波集中除了最大TA对应的载波之外的载波的射频链路;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波向第一载波切换进行上行传输;或者,可理解为终端设备将第一载波集中的最大 TA对应的载波的射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第一载波所在的频段(或频带),以及关闭应用于第一载波集中除了最大TA对应的载波之外的载波的射频链路。Similarly, when the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, it can be understood that the terminal device switches the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier. The frequency of a carrier, and closing the radio frequency links of carriers in the first carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the largest TA; or, it can be understood as the terminal device switching from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier Perform uplink transmission; alternatively, it can be understood as the terminal device concentrating the maximum amount of the first carrier Switch the frequency band (or frequency band) where the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the TA is located to the frequency band (or frequency band) where the first carrier is located, and close the radio frequency link applied to the carriers in the first carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the largest TA .
需要说明的是,在本方式二中,第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,那么该第二载波集中除了最小TA对应的载波之外的载波可理解为该第二载波集中最大TA对应的载波。同理,该第二载波集中除了最大TA对应的载波之外的载波可理解为该第二载波集中最小TA对应的载波。It should be noted that in this method 2, the first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, then the carriers in the second carrier set except the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA can be understood as the maximum TA in the second carrier set corresponding carrier. Similarly, the carriers in the second carrier set other than the carrier corresponding to the largest TA can be understood as the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
作为一个示例,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波。例如,第一消息的取值可用于指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波。例如,第一消息的取值为10,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波。又例如,第一消息的取值为11,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波。应理解的是,本申请实施例对第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波的具体实现方式并不限定于此。As an example, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. For example, the value of the first message may be used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. For example, the value of the first message is 10, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier. For another example, the value of the first message is 11, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation of the first message instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
作为一个示例,第一消息中的第二标识可以是第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,或者是第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA所归属的TAG的标识。为了便于理解,后文以第二标识是第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识为例进行描述。例如,第二标识是第二TA的标识。又例如,第二标识是第一TA的标识。As an example, the second identifier in the first message may be an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, or an identifier of a TAG to which a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set belongs. For ease of understanding, the following description takes an example in which the second identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set. For example, the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA. For another example, the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA.
作为又一个示例,第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波以及包括第二标识。例如,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,且该第一消息中的第二标识是第二TA的标识;或者,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,且该第一消息中的第二标识是第一TA的标识。又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,且该第一消息中的第二标识是第一TA的标识;或者,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,且该第一消息中的第二标识是第二TA的标识。As another example, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier and includes the second identifier. For example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identifier in the first message is that of the second TA. identification; or, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identification in the first message is the identification of the first TA. For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identifier in the first message is the first TA. or, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the second identifier in the first message is the identifier of the second TA.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还可以指示第一切换间隔被配置的载波。在本方式二中,该第一切换间隔是终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波的时长。通过该实现方式,终端设备根据该第一消息可以确定载波切换过程因调整射频链路等需要中断的载波。例如,第一消息可指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换后的载波上,或指示该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或指示该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或指示该第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上以及该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或指示该第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波以及该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上。应理解的是,在方式二中,该载波切换后的载波为第一载波。In a possible implementation, the first message may also indicate the carrier for which the first switching interval is configured. In this second method, the first switching interval is the time period for the terminal equipment to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier. Through this implementation, the terminal device can determine the carrier that needs to be interrupted due to adjustment of the radio frequency link or the like in the carrier switching process based on the first message. For example, the first message may indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, or indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set and the first part of the first switching interval is excepted The remaining part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or indicates that the first part in the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set and the first switching interval The remaining parts except the first part are configured on the carrier after carrier switching. It should be understood that in the second method, the carrier after the carrier switching is the first carrier.
例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。For example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set. On the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA.
例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示该第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换后的载波上。For example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier after the carrier switch. superior.
又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA.
又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示该第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换后的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first switching interval is configured after the carrier switching. on the carrier.
再例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and indicate that the first part of the first switching interval is It is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
再例如,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上。 For another example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicate that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier. On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in a carrier set, the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after carrier switching.
通过上述方式二,网络设备可通过TA的相关信息(如最大TA,或最小TA,或TA的标识)指示终端设备从第二载波或第三载波切换至第一载波。并且,网络设备还可以通过TA的相关信息指示载波切换过程中,第一切换间隔被配置的载波。Through the above second method, the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier through TA related information (such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the TA identification). Furthermore, the network device may also indicate the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process through TA related information.
方式三:第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,第一消息可触发终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波,或者触发终端设备从第一载波切换至第三载波,从第四载波切换至第二载波。具体的,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,或者第一消息指示(或包括)第三标识和第四标识,或者第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波以及包括第三标识和第四标识。Method 3: The first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier, and the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier. The first message can trigger the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Switch to the third carrier, or trigger the terminal equipment to switch from the first carrier to the third carrier, or from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Specifically, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or maximum TA in the second carrier set, or the first message may indicate (or include) The third identification and the fourth identification, or the first message instructs the terminal equipment to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set and includes the third identification and Fourth logo.
其中,第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,可理解为该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波;或者理解为该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波;或者理解为该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波;或者理解为该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波。The first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. It can be understood that the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or it can be understood that the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the maximum TA; or it is understood that the first message instructs the terminal equipment to switch from the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the second carrier set; or it is understood that the first message instructs the terminal equipment Switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
可选的,该第一消息还可以指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波;或者,可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波。Optionally, the first message may also instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and to switch to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set; or, the terminal device may be instructed to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the smallest TA in the first carrier set corresponds to The carrier is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
在本方式三中,终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,可理解为终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波,以及从第四载波切换至第三载波;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波切换至第三载波,以及从第四载波切换至第二载波;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波被激活,第四载波被激活,第二载波去激活和第三载波去激活的状态切换至第一载波去激活,第四载波去激活,第二载波被激活和第三载波被激活的状态;或者,可理解为终端设备从通过第一载波和第四载波进行数据传输的状态切换至通过第二载波和第三载波进行数据传输的状态。In this third method, the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set, which can be understood as the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, it can be understood that It means that the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment is activated from the first carrier, the fourth carrier is activated, the second carrier is deactivated, and The state in which the third carrier is deactivated switches to the state in which the first carrier is deactivated, the fourth carrier is deactivated, the second carrier is activated, and the third carrier is activated; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the state where the first carrier and the fourth carrier are activated. The state of the carrier for data transmission is switched to the state of data transmission through the second carrier and the third carrier.
在本方式三中,第一载波集包括两个载波,第二载波集包括两个载波。终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波(或终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波),可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的射频链路对应的频率切换至(或调整到)第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的频率,以及将应用于第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的频率;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波向第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换进行上行传输,以及从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波向第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换进行上行传输;或者,可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波所在的频段(或频带),以及将应用于第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波所在的频段(或频带)。In this third method, the first carrier set includes two carriers, and the second carrier set includes two carriers. The terminal equipment switches from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA in the second carrier set (or the terminal equipment switches from the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the maximum TA in the second carrier set) carrier), it can be understood that the terminal device switches the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to (or adjusts) the frequency corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and Switch the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA in the second carrier set; or, it can be understood that the terminal device switches from the minimum TA in the first carrier set The corresponding carrier switches to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission, and switches from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission; or, it can be It is understood that the terminal device switches the frequency band (or frequency band) of the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the frequency band (or frequency band) of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and switches The frequency band (or frequency band) applied to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the frequency band (or frequency band) where the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set is located.
类似的,终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波(或终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波),可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的频率,以及将应用于第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的频率;或者,可理解为终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波向第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换进行上行传输,以及从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波向第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换进行上行传输;或者,可理解为终端设备将应用于第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波所在的频段(或频带),以及将应用于第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的射频链路所在的频段(或频带)切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波所在的频段(或频带)。其中的频率可替换为频点。 Similarly, the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set (or the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the second carrier set). The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA) can be understood as the terminal device switches the frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and applies The frequency corresponding to the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the frequency corresponding to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or, it can be understood that the terminal equipment switches from the frequency corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to The carrier is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission, and the carrier is switched from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set for uplink transmission; or, it can be understood as The terminal equipment switches the frequency band (or frequency band) of the radio frequency link applied to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the frequency band (or frequency band) of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and applies the The frequency band (or frequency band) where the radio frequency link of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is located is switched to the frequency band (or frequency band) where the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set is located. The frequency can be replaced by a frequency point.
作为一个示例,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波。例如,第一消息的取值可用于指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波。例如,第一消息的取值为00,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。例如,第一消息的取值为01,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波。又例如,第一消息的取值为10,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。再例如,第一消息的取值为11,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波。应理解的是,本申请实施例对第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波的具体实现方式并不限定于此。As an example, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. For example, the value of the first message may be used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. For example, the value of the first message is 00, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. For example, the value of the first message is 01, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. For another example, the value of the first message is 10, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. For another example, the value of the first message is 11, and the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not include the specific implementation of the first message instructing the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or maximum TA in the second carrier set. It is not limited to this.
作为一个示例,第一消息包括第三标识和第四标识。该第三标识可以是第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,或者是第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA所归属的TAG的标识。该第四标识可以是第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,或者是第二载波集中的一个对应的TA所归属的TAG的标识。为了便于理解,后文以第三标识是第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,第四标识是第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识为例进行描述。例如,第三标识是第一TA的标识,第四标识是第二TA的标识。例如,第三标识是第一TA的标识,第四标识是第一TA的标识。又例如,第三标识是第二TA的标识,第四标识是第一TA的标识。再例如,第三标识是第二TA的标识,第四标识是第二TA的标识。As an example, the first message includes a third identification and a fourth identification. The third identifier may be an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, or an identifier of a TAG to which a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set belongs. The fourth identifier may be an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set, or an identifier of a TAG to which a corresponding TA in the second carrier set belongs. For ease of understanding, the following description will take the example that the third identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set. For example, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA. For example, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA. For another example, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA. For another example, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA.
作为又一个示例,第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,以及包括第三标识和第四标识。例如,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,且第三标识可以是第二TA的标识,第四标识可以是第二TA的标识。又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,且第三标识可以是第一TA的标识,第四标识可以是第二TA的标识,其余情况类似,在此不再一一列举。As yet another example, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier. . For example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the third identifier may be the second The identity of the TA. The fourth identity may be the identity of the second TA. For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third identifier may be the The fourth identifier may be the identifier of one TA, and the fourth identifier may be the identifier of the second TA. The other situations are similar and will not be listed one by one here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还可以指示第二切换间隔(可记为GAP2)和第三切换间隔(可记为GAP3)被配置的载波。其中,该第二切换间隔是第一载波切换至第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,第三切换间隔则是第四载波切换至第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。或者,该第二切换间隔是第一载波切换至第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,该第三切换间隔则是第四载波切换至第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。通过该实现方式,终端设备根据该第一消息可以确定载波切换过程因调整射频链路等需要中断的载波。例如,第一消息可指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者指示第二切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分(可记为GAP3_1)被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及该第三切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分(可记为GAP3_2)被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分(可记为GAP2_1)被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,第二切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分(可记为GAP2_2)被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。In a possible implementation manner, the first message may also indicate the carrier for which the second switching interval (which may be noted as GAP2) and the third switching interval (which may be noted as GAP3) are configured. The second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier. Alternatively, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Through this implementation, the terminal device can determine the carrier that needs to be interrupted due to adjustment of the radio frequency link or the like in the carrier switching process based on the first message. For example, the first message may indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or it may indicate the second switching. The interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or it is indicated that the second switching interval is configured on the largest TA in the first carrier set. On the carrier corresponding to TA, the first part of the third switching interval (can be recorded as GAP3_1) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the third switching interval except the first part (can be recorded as GAP3_2) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set; or indicates that the first part of the second switching interval (can be recorded as GAP2_1) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set above, the remainder of the second switching interval except the first part (which can be recorded as GAP2_2) is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the largest TA in the first carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to TA.
例如,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波。在此情况下,该第一消息还可以指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,该第一消息还可以指示第二切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。For example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; Alternatively, the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
又例如,第一TA大于第二TA,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切 换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。在此情况下,该第一消息还可以指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The carrier switch corresponding to the largest TA in a carrier set Switch to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set.
又例如,第一TA小于第二TA,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。在此情况下,该第一消息还可以指示第二切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set.
再例如,第一TA大于第二TA,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。在此情况下,该第一消息还可以指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the first message may also indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. on the carrier, and the remaining part in the third switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set.
再例如,第一TA小于第二TA,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波。在此情况下,该第一消息还可以指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,第二切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。For another example, if the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in one carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the first message may also indicate that the first part of the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set.
通过上述方式三,网络设备可通过TA的相关信息(如最大TA,或最小TA,或TA的标识)指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波,或者从第一载波切换至第三载波,从第四载波切换至第二载波。并且,网络设备还可以通过TA的相关信息指示载波切换过程中,第一切换间隔被配置的载波。Through the above method three, the network device can instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier through the relevant information of the TA (such as the maximum TA, or the minimum TA, or the identification of the TA). Or switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Furthermore, the network device may also indicate the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process through TA related information.
需要说明的是,图3中S301、S302以及S303的执行顺序仅为一种示例,本申请实施例并不限定于此。例如,网络设备可以先为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA,再向终端设备发送第一消息;或者,网络设备也可以在为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA的同时,向终端设备发送第一消息;或者,网络设备还可以在向终端设备发送第一消息之后,为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA,本申请实施例对此不作限定。又例如,例如,网络设备可以先为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA,再接收来自终端设备发送第二消息;或者,网络设备也可以在为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA的同时,接收来自终端设备发送第二消息;或者,网络设备还可以在接收到来自终端设备的第二消息之后,为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that the execution sequence of S301, S302 and S303 in Figure 3 is only an example, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the network device can first configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, and then send the first message to the terminal device; or, the network device can also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device and at the same time, send the first message to the terminal device. The device sends the first message; or, the network device can also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device after sending the first message to the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. For another example, the network device may first configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, and then receive the second message from the terminal device; or the network device may also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device. At the same time, a second message is received from the terminal device; or, the network device can also configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device after receiving the second message from the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
S304:终端设备根据第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。S304: The terminal device switches from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message.
在S304中,终端设备可以根据第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。该第一消息可通过前述的方式一、方式二或方式三中的一种或多种,指示终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集。下面针对该方式一、方式二和方式三分别介绍终端设备从第一载波集切换至第二载波集的具体实现过程。In S304, the terminal device may switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message. The first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set through one or more of the aforementioned manner 1, 2 or 3. The following describes the specific implementation process of the terminal device switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set for the first, second and third methods respectively.
对于方式一:第一载波集包括第一载波,第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括(或指示)第一标识。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波或切换至第三载波。其中,在方式一中,载波切换过程中的第一切换间隔被配置的载波可以是网络设备指示的,或者也可以是终端设备确定的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。为了便于描述,本申请实施例以网络设备指示第一切换间隔被配置的载波为例。For method 1: the first carrier set includes the first carrier, and the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. The corresponding carrier, and/or includes (or indicates) the first identifier. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier according to the first message. In Method 1, the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process may be indicated by the network device, or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. For convenience of description, this embodiment of the present application takes the carrier for which the network device indicates that the first switching interval is configured as an example.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波。相应的,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波或切换至第三载波。In a possible implementation, the first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set. Correspondingly, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier according to the first message.
需要说明的是,终端设备可以在第一值内将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的频率,而将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的频率所用的时长可以为该第一值,或者还可以为其它值,本申请实施例对此不作限定。类似的,终端设备可以在第一值内将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波的频率,而将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波的频率所占用的时长可以为该第一值, 或者还可以为其它值,本申请实施例对此不作限定。其中,第一值的描述请参考术语解释部分,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the terminal equipment can switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set within the first value, and switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the third The duration used by the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the two-carrier set may be the first value, or may be other values, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Similarly, the terminal device can switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency corresponding to the carrier with the largest TA in the second carrier set within the first value, and switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the second carrier. The duration occupied by the frequency of the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the concentration can be the first value, Or it can also be other values, which are not limited in the embodiments of this application. For the description of the first value, please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
作为一个示例,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波上,如该第一切换间隔可位于第一载波对应的一个时隙(可记为时隙1)的尾部。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,如图4所示;或者,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值,如图5所示。As an example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switching. superior. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first message. The first switching interval is configured on the first carrier. For example, the first switching interval may be located on a corresponding carrier of the first carrier. The end of the time slot (can be recorded as time slot 1). Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 4; or, the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 5 Show.
其中,该第一值与第二值之差,可理解为该第一值与第二值之间的差值的绝对值。第二值,又可以称为TA差,是第一TA与第二TA之差,例如该第二值可以是第一TA与第二TA之间的差值的绝对值。The difference between the first value and the second value can be understood as the absolute value of the difference between the first value and the second value. The second value, which may also be called the TA difference, is the difference between the first TA and the second TA. For example, the second value may be the absolute value of the difference between the first TA and the second TA.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以根据信息1(和/或信息2)确定第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,或者为第一值。本申请实施例中以终端设备根据信息1确定第一切换间隔的取值为例,应理解的是,终端设备根据信息2(或信息1和信息2)确定第一切换间隔的取值可以参考终端设备根据信息1确定第一切换间隔的取值的相关内容。In a possible implementation, the terminal device may determine, according to information 1 (and/or information 2), that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is the first value. In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device determines the value of the first switching interval based on information 1 as an example. It should be understood that when the terminal device determines the value of the first switching interval based on information 2 (or information 1 and information 2), please refer to The terminal device determines the relevant content of the value of the first switching interval based on the information 1.
例如,信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,在此情况下,终端设备根据该信息1可以确定第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,这样即便终端设备还未完成第一载波到第二载波的切换,终端设备也可以在时刻T2(图4未示出)之后以及时刻T1之前开始通过第三载波传输数据,能够提高数据传输效率,提高资源利用率。其中,时刻T1是终端设备在时隙2中开始传输数据的时刻。时刻T2可以是终端设备将第二射频链路切换到第三载波的频率的完成时刻,例如该时刻T2可以是终端设备调整第一射频链路的起始时刻与时刻T1之间的一个时刻。为了便于描述,后文在第一TA大于第二TA的情况下,以时刻T2是时隙2的起始时刻为例。For example, the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed. In this case, the terminal device can determine the first switching interval as based on the information 1. The difference between the first value and the second value, so that even if the terminal equipment has not completed the switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, the terminal equipment can start to pass the third carrier after time T2 (not shown in Figure 4) and before time T1. Carrier waves transmit data, which can improve data transmission efficiency and improve resource utilization. Among them, time T1 is the time when the terminal device starts transmitting data in time slot 2. Time T2 may be the completion time when the terminal device switches the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier. For example, time T2 may be a time between the starting time when the terminal device adjusts the first radio frequency link and time T1. For the convenience of description, in the following, when the first TA is larger than the second TA, time T2 is taken as the starting time of time slot 2 as an example.
又例如,信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,在此情况下,终端设备根据该信息1可以确定第一切换间隔为第一值,这样终端设备能够在从第一载波切换至第二载波的完成时刻(即时隙2的起始时刻或时隙1的结束时刻)开始通过第三载波传输数据,能够提高数据传输效率,提高资源利用率。For another example, the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed. In this case, the terminal device can determine the first switching based on the information 1. The interval is a first value, so that the terminal device can start transmitting data through the third carrier at the completion time of switching from the first carrier to the second carrier (i.e., the starting time of slot 2 or the end time of slot 1), which can improve data transmission efficiency and improve resource utilization.
需要说明的是,若终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备也可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,在此情况下,终端设备需要在时刻T1开始通过第二载波和/或第三载波传输数据。It should be noted that if the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can also determine that the first switching interval is the first value and the first value. The difference between the two values, in this case, the terminal device needs to start transmitting data through the second carrier and/or the third carrier at time T1.
需要说明的是,终端设备在载波上传输数据的开始时刻(或起始时刻)可以是终端设备自身确定的(如对数据进行打孔(puncture)),也可以是网络设备根据信息1确定的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。例如,第一TA大于第二TA,信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备向网络设备发送信息1,网络设备接收信息1之后,可以根据该信息1调度终端设备在时隙2的起始时刻在第三载波上传输数据。又例如,第一TA大于第二TA,信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备向网络设备发送信息1,网络设备接收信息1之后,可以根据该信息1调度终端设备在时刻T1在第三载波上传输数据。It should be noted that the start time (or start time) of the terminal device transmitting data on the carrier can be determined by the terminal device itself (such as puncturing the data), or it can be determined by the network device based on information 1 , the embodiment of the present application does not limit this. For example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device sends information 1 to the network device, and the network After the device receives the information 1, the terminal device can be scheduled to transmit data on the third carrier at the starting time of the time slot 2 based on the information 1. For another example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, and the terminal device sends information 1 to the network device. , after the network device receives the information 1, the terminal device can be scheduled to transmit data on the third carrier at time T1 according to the information 1.
在图4所示的示例中,第一TA大于第二TA,终端设备与第一TA对应的网络设备(记为网络设备1)之间的通信距离远于终端设备与第二TA对应的网络设备(记为网络设备2)之间的通信距离,意味着终端设备需要提前更多的时间在第一载波或第三载波上传输数据,例如终端设备在时隙2的起始时刻开始在第三载波上传输数据,在时刻T1开始在第二载波上传输数据,该时隙2的起始时刻与时刻T1之差等于第一TA与第二TA之差,如图4所示。在此情况下,终端设备可以从较大TA对应的第一载波切换至较小TA对应的第二载波,这样可以利用两个载波之间的TA差来补偿这两个载波切换时载波被中断的时长,从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。一个时隙的头部通常用于传输控制信息,一个时隙的尾部通常用于传输数据,终端设备将第一切换间隔配置在时隙1的尾部,虽然中断了终端设备通过第一载波在该时隙1的尾部的数据传输但不会影响该时隙1中通过第一载波的控制信息的传输。并且,终端设备将第一切换间隔配置载波切换前的载波上,能够避免影响终端设备通过第二载波和第三 载波的控制信息的传输,使得网络设备能够及时调度终端设备在第二载波和第三载波上的数据传输。In the example shown in Figure 4, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device corresponding to the first TA (denoted as network device 1) is longer than the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device corresponding to the second TA. The communication distance between devices (recorded as network device 2) means that the terminal device needs more time in advance to transmit data on the first carrier or the third carrier. For example, the terminal device starts transmitting data on the first carrier or the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2. Data is transmitted on three carriers, and data is transmitted on the second carrier starting at time T1. The difference between the starting time of time slot 2 and time T1 is equal to the difference between the first TA and the second TA, as shown in Figure 4. In this case, the terminal equipment can switch from the first carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the second carrier corresponding to the smaller TA. In this way, the TA difference between the two carriers can be used to compensate for the interruption of the carrier when the two carriers are switched. The duration is shortened from the duration that originally needs to interrupt the first value to the duration that is the difference between the first value and the second value, thereby reducing the duration that the terminal device interrupts data transmission on the carrier, and improving resource utilization. The head of a time slot is usually used to transmit control information, and the tail of a time slot is usually used to transmit data. The terminal equipment configures the first switching interval at the end of time slot 1, although the terminal equipment is interrupted through the first carrier in the The data transmission at the end of time slot 1 will not affect the transmission of control information through the first carrier in this time slot 1. Moreover, the terminal equipment configures the first switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching, which can avoid affecting the terminal equipment through the second carrier and the third carrier. The transmission of carrier control information enables the network device to timely schedule the data transmission of the terminal device on the second carrier and the third carrier.
在上述图5所示的示例中,终端设备从较大TA对应的第一载波切换至较小TA对应的第二载波,虽然没有利用两个载波之间的TA差来补偿这两个载波切换时载波被中断的时长,但终端设备将第一切换间隔配置为第一值,即配置为一个通用值,能够减少终端设备处理复杂度,能够在终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信的情况下,提前通过第三载波传输数据,提高数据传输效率和资源利用率。In the above example shown in Figure 5, the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the second carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, although the TA difference between the two carriers is not used to compensate for the switching of the two carriers. The length of time the carrier is interrupted, but the terminal equipment configures the first handover interval as the first value, that is, it is configured as a common value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and can be used when the terminal equipment does not support the completion of switching of a radio frequency link. When communicating through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link, data is transmitted through the third carrier in advance to improve data transmission efficiency and resource utilization.
作为一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第三载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波上,如该第一切换间隔可位于第一载波对应的一个时隙(可记为时隙1)的尾部。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值,如图6所示;或者,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和,如图7所示。As an example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before the carrier switching. superior. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier according to the first message. The first switching interval is configured on the first carrier. For example, the first switching interval may be located on a corresponding carrier of the first carrier. The end of the time slot (can be recorded as time slot 1). Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 6; or, the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 7 Show.
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T1通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时隙2的起始时刻通过第三载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时隙2的起始时刻通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时隙2的起始时刻通过第三载波传输数据。在方式1_2中,时刻T1是终端设备调整第一射频链路的起始时刻与时隙1的结束时刻之间的一个时刻,如图6、图7所示。In the above example, if information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T1, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit through the second carrier at the beginning of time slot 2 data, and/or transmit data via the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2. In mode 1_2, time T1 is a time between the starting time when the terminal equipment adjusts the first radio frequency link and the end time of time slot 1, as shown in Figures 6 and 7 .
在图6所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备与的网络设备2之间的通信距离远于终端设备网络设备1之间的通信距离,意味着终端设备需要提前更多的时间在第二载波上传输数据,例如终端设备在时刻T1开始在第二载波上传输数据,在时隙2的起始时刻开始在第三载波上传输数据,该时刻T1与时隙2的起始时刻之差等于第二TA与第一TA之差,如图6所示。在此情况下,终端设备在具有相同TA的两个载波间进行切换,并将第一切换间隔配置为第一值,能够减少终端设备处理复杂度。并且,终端设备将第一切换间隔配置载波切换前的载波上,且位于时隙1的尾部,能够避免影响该时隙1中通过第一载波的控制信息的传输,以及避免影响终端设备通过第二载波和第三载波的控制信息的传输,使得网络设备能够及时调度终端设备在第二载波和第三载波上的数据传输。In the example shown in Figure 6, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device 2 is farther than the communication distance between the terminal device and the network device 1, which means that the terminal device needs to advance more time to transmit data on the second carrier. For example, the terminal device starts transmitting data on the second carrier at time T1 and starts transmitting data on the third carrier at the starting time of time slot 2. This time T1 is the same as the time of time slot 2. The difference in starting time is equal to the difference between the second TA and the first TA, as shown in Figure 6. In this case, the terminal equipment switches between two carriers with the same TA and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment. Furthermore, the terminal equipment configures the first switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching and is located at the end of time slot 1, which can avoid affecting the transmission of control information through the first carrier in time slot 1 and avoid affecting the transmission of the terminal equipment through the third carrier. The transmission of control information of the second carrier and the third carrier enables the network device to timely schedule the data transmission of the terminal device on the second carrier and the third carrier.
在图7所示的示例中,终端设备在具有相同TA的两个载波间进行切换,并将第一切换间隔配置为第一值与第二值之和,能够为终端设备预留足够的时间调整射频链路。In the example shown in Figure 7, the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and the first switching interval is configured as the sum of the first value and the second value, which can reserve enough time for the terminal device. Adjust the RF link.
作为又一个示例,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第二载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,如图8所示。As another example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the second carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the second carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 8 .
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时隙2的起始时刻通过第三载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第三载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据。在方式1_3中,时刻T3是终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波的完成时刻,位于时隙2的起始时刻之后,如图8所示。In the above example, if information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can communicate through the third radio frequency link at the beginning of time slot 2. The carrier transmits data, and/or the second carrier transmits data at time T3. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the third carrier at time T3, and/or At time T3, data is transmitted via the second carrier. In mode 1_3, time T3 is the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, which is located after the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 8 .
在图8所示的示例中,第一TA大于第二TA,终端设备可以从较大TA对应的第一载波切换至较小TA对应的第二载波,这样可以利用两个载波之间的TA差来补偿这两个载波切换时载波被中断的时长,从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。In the example shown in Figure 8, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the first carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the second carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, so that the TA between the two carriers can be utilized. The difference is used to compensate for the length of time that the carrier is interrupted when the two carriers are switched. The length of time that originally needs to be interrupted is shortened from the length of time that needs to be interrupted to the length of time that is the difference between the first value and the second value. This can reduce the interruption of data transmission by terminal equipment on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
作为又一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第三载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第三载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值,如图9所示。As another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the second carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine the first switching interval to be the first value, as shown in Figure 9.
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T1通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T4通过第三 载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T4通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T4通过第三载波传输数据。在方式1_4中,时刻T4是终端设备从第一载波切换至第三载波的完成时刻,位于时隙2的起始时刻之后,如图9所示。In the above example, if information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T1, and /or pass the third at time T4 Carrier waves transmit data. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T4, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T4. In mode 1_4, time T4 is the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, which is located after the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 9 .
在上述图9所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备在具有相同TA的两个载波间进行切换,并将第一切换间隔配置为第一值,能够减少终端设备处理复杂度。In the above example shown in Figure 9, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal device processing. Spend.
作为再一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,以及指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,该第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一部分为第二值以及该剩余部分为第一值,如图10所示;或者,终端设备可以确定该第一部分为第一值以及该剩余部分为第二值,如图11所示。As yet another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier before carrier switching, the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the second carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the second value and the remaining part is the first value, as shown in Figure 10; or, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the second value. value, as shown in Figure 11.
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时隙2的起始时刻通过第三载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T3通过第三载波传输数据。在方式1_5中,时刻T3可以位于时隙2的起始时刻之后,如图10所示;或者,也可以为时隙2的起始时刻,如图11所示。In the above example, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T3. In mode 1_5, time T3 may be located after the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 10; or it may be the starting time of time slot 2, as shown in Figure 11.
在图10和图11所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备从较大TA对应的载波切换至较小TA对应的载波,并将第一切换间隔的一部分配置在第一载波上,将剩余部分配置在第二载波上,这样可以利用第一载波与第二载波之间的TA差尽早实现通过第二载波和第三载波并行传输数据,提高数据传输效率。In the examples shown in Figures 10 and 11, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device switches from the carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, and configures a part of the first switching interval in the first On the carrier, the remaining part is configured on the second carrier, so that the TA difference between the first carrier and the second carrier can be used to transmit data in parallel through the second carrier and the third carrier as soon as possible, improving data transmission efficiency.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,第一消息包括第一标识。例如,第一标识是第一TA的标识,终端设备根据该第一标识,可以从第一载波切换至第三载波。又例如,第一标识是第二TA的标识,终端设备根据该第一标识,可以从第一载波切换至第二载波。在本示例中,第一切换间隔被配置的载波以及第一切换间隔的大小的确定可参考图4至图11的相关描述,此处不再赘述。In another possible implementation, the first message includes the first identifier. For example, the first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the third carrier according to the first identifier. For another example, the first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the second carrier according to the first identifier. In this example, the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured and the size of the first switching interval can be determined with reference to the relevant descriptions in FIGS. 4 to 11 , which will not be described again here.
需要说明的是,终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波时,该终端设备可以同时将终端设备应用于第一载波的第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率以及将终端设备的第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率;或者也可以先将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率,再将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率;或者还可以先将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率,再将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率;或者,还可以先将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率,并在该切换过程中再将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率,本申请实施例不作限定。It should be noted that when the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, the terminal equipment can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link applied by the terminal equipment to the first carrier to the frequency of the second carrier and switch the terminal The frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link of the device is switched to the frequency of the third carrier; or the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link can be switched to the frequency of the second carrier first, and then the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched. to the frequency of the third carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier first, and then switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency of the second carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier. The frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link is first switched to the frequency of the second carrier, and during the switching process, the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the third carrier. This is not limited by the embodiment of the present application.
类似的,终端设备从第一载波切换至第三载波时,终端设备可以同时将终端设备应用于第一载波的第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率以及将终端设备的第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率;或者也可以先将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率,再将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率;或者还可以先将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率,再将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率;或者,还可以先将第一射频链路对应的频率切换至第三载波的频率,并在该切换过程中再将第二射频链路对应的频率切换至第二载波的频率,本申请实施例不作限定。Similarly, when the terminal equipment switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, the terminal equipment can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link of the terminal equipment applied to the first carrier to the frequency of the third carrier and change the third frequency of the terminal equipment. The frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the second carrier; or the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link can be switched to the frequency of the third carrier first, and then the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the second carrier. The frequency of the carrier; or you can also first switch the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link to the frequency of the second carrier, and then switch the frequency corresponding to the first radio frequency link to the frequency of the third carrier; or you can also first switch the frequency corresponding to the third carrier. The frequency corresponding to one radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the third carrier, and during the switching process, the frequency corresponding to the second radio frequency link is switched to the frequency of the second carrier. This is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.
对于方式二:第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,第二载波集包括第一载波,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,和/或包括(或指示)第二标识。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第二载波或第三载波切换至第一载波。其中,在方式二中,载波切换过程中的第一切换间隔被配置的载波可以是网络设备指示的,或者也可以是终端设备确定的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。为了便于描述,本申请实施例以网络设备指示第一切换间隔被配置的载波为例。For method two: the first carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier, and the second carrier set includes the first carrier. The first message may instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the first carrier set to the third carrier. a carrier, and/or includes (or indicates) a second identifier. In this case, the terminal device switches from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message. In the second method, the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured during the carrier switching process may be indicated by the network device or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. For convenience of description, this embodiment of the present application takes the carrier for which the network device indicates that the first switching interval is configured as an example.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中最小TA或最大TA对应的载 波切换至第一载波,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第二载波或第三载波切换至第一载波。In a possible implementation, the first message may instruct the terminal device to select the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA from the first carrier set. The first carrier is switched to the first carrier, and the terminal device switches from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message.
需要说明的是,终端设备可以在第一值内将终端设备应用于第二载波的第三射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,而关闭应用于第三载波的第四射频链路所用的时长可以为该第一值,或者还可以为其它值,本申请实施例对此不作限定。类似的,终端设备可以在第一值内将第四射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,而关闭第三射频链路所用的时长可以为该第一值,或者还可以为其它值,本申请实施例对此不作限定。其中,第一值的描述请参考术语解释部分,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the terminal device may switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link applied to the second carrier by the terminal device to the frequency of the first carrier within the first value, and close the fourth radio frequency chain applied to the third carrier. The duration of the road may be the first value, or may be another value, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Similarly, the terminal device can switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier within the first value, and the time period for closing the third radio frequency link can be the first value, or it can be other values. value, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application. For the description of the first value, please refer to the terminology explanation section and will not be repeated here.
作为一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第三载波切换至第一载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第三载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值,如图12所示。As an example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set. On the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA. In this case, the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine the first switching interval to be the first value, as shown in Figure 12.
在图12所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备在具有相同TA的两个载波间进行切换,并将第一切换间隔配置为第一值,能够减少终端设备处理复杂度。并且,终端设备将第一切换间隔配置载波切换前的载波上,能够避免影响终端设备通过第一载波的控制信息的传输,使得网络设备能够及时调度终端设备在第一载波上的数据传输。In the example shown in Figure 12, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal device. . Moreover, the terminal device configures the first switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching, which can avoid affecting the transmission of control information of the terminal device through the first carrier, so that the network device can timely schedule the data transmission of the terminal device on the first carrier.
作为一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在切载波切换后的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第三载波切换至第一载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值,如图13所示。As an example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured after the carrier switching. on the carrier. In this case, the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 13.
在图13所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备在具有相同TA的两个载波间进行切换,并将第一切换间隔配置为第一值,能够减少终端设备处理复杂度。In the example shown in Figure 13, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and configures the first switching interval as the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal device. .
作为又一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第二载波切换至第一载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第二载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,如图14所示。As another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured in the first carrier set. on the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA. In this case, the terminal device switches from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the second carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 14.
在图14所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备可以从较大TA对应的第二载波切换至较小TA对应的第一载波,这样可以利用两个载波之间的TA差来补偿这两个载波切换时载波被中断的时长,从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。In the example shown in Figure 14, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the second carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the first carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, so that the TA between the two carriers can be utilized. The difference is used to compensate for the length of time that the carrier is interrupted when the two carriers are switched. The length of time that originally needs to be interrupted is shortened from the length of time that needs to be interrupted to the length of time that is the difference between the first value and the second value. This can reduce the interruption of data transmission by terminal equipment on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
作为又一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换后的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第二载波切换至第一载波,该第一切换间隔被配置在第一载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,如图15所示。As another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first switching interval is configured after the carrier switching. on the carrier. In this case, the terminal device switches from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, and the first switching interval is configured on the first carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 15 .
在图15所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备可以从较大TA对应的第二载波切换至较小TA对应的第一载波,这样可以利用两个载波之间的TA差来补偿这两个载波切换时载波被中断的时长,从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。In the example shown in Figure 15, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the second carrier corresponding to the larger TA to the first carrier corresponding to the smaller TA, so that the TA between the two carriers can be utilized. The difference is used to compensate for the length of time that the carrier is interrupted when the two carriers are switched. The length of time that originally needs to be interrupted is shortened from the length of time that needs to be interrupted to the length of time that is the difference between the first value and the second value. This can reduce the interruption of data transmission by terminal equipment on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
作为又一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第三载波切换至第一载波,该第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第三载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一部分为第一值以及该剩余部分为第一值与第二值之差,如图16所示。As another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the second carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 16 .
作为再一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第三载波切换至第二载波,该第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第三载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一部分为第一值以及该剩余部分为第一值与第二值之差,如图17所示。 As yet another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the second carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the third carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the second carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 17 .
作为再一个示例,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第一载波,以及指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第二载波切换至第一载波,该第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第二载波上,该第一切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第一载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一部分为第二值以及该剩余部分为第一值,如图18所示;或者,终端设备可以确定该第一部分为第一值以及该剩余部分为第二值,如图19所示。As yet another example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the remainder of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after carrier switching. In this case, the terminal device switches from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the first message, the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the second carrier, and the first part of the first switching interval is The remaining part is configured on the first carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the second value and the remaining part is the first value, as shown in Figure 18; or, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the first value and the remaining part is the second value. value, as shown in Figure 19.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,第一消息包括第二标识。例如,第二标识是第一TA的标识,终端设备根据该第二标识,可以从第三载波切换至第一载波。又例如,第二标识是第二TA的标识,终端设备根据该第二标识,可以从第二载波切换至第一载波。在本示例中,第一切换间隔被配置的载波以及第一切换间隔的大小的确定可参考图12至图19的相关描述,此处不再赘述。In yet another possible implementation, the first message includes the second identification. For example, the second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the terminal device can switch from the third carrier to the first carrier according to the second identifier. For another example, the second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the terminal device can switch from the second carrier to the first carrier according to the second identifier. In this example, the carrier to which the first switching interval is configured and the size of the first switching interval can be determined with reference to the relevant descriptions in FIGS. 12 to 19 , which will not be described again here.
需要说明的是,终端设备从第二载波切换至第一载波时,该终端设备可以同时将终端设备应用于第二载波的第三射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率以及关闭终端设备应用于第三载波的第四射频链路;或者也可以先将第三射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,再关闭第四射频链路;或者还可以先关闭第四射频链路,再将第三射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率;或者还可以先将第三射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,并在该切换过程中再关闭第四射频链路,本申请实施例不作限定。It should be noted that when the terminal equipment switches from the second carrier to the first carrier, the terminal equipment can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link applied by the terminal equipment to the second carrier to the frequency of the first carrier and turn off the terminal. The device is applied to the fourth radio frequency link of the third carrier; or you can first switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier, and then turn off the fourth radio frequency link; or you can also turn off the fourth radio frequency first. link, and then switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the third radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier first, and then turn it off during the switching process. The fourth radio frequency link is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
类似的,终端设备从第三载波切换至第一载波时,该终端设备可以同时将终端设备应用于第三载波的第四射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率以及关闭终端设备应用于第二载波的第三射频链路;或者也可以先将第四射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,再关闭第三射频链路;或者还可以先关闭第三射频链路,再将第四射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率;或者还可以先将第四射频链路对应的频率切换至第一载波的频率,并在该切换过程中再关闭第三射频链路,本申请实施例不作限定。Similarly, when the terminal device switches from the third carrier to the first carrier, the terminal device can simultaneously switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link applied by the terminal device to the third carrier to the frequency of the first carrier and close the terminal device application. The third radio frequency link of the second carrier; or you can first switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier, and then close the third radio frequency link; or you can also close the third radio frequency link first , and then switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier; or you can also switch the frequency corresponding to the fourth radio frequency link to the frequency of the first carrier first, and then turn off the third radio frequency link during the switching process. The radio frequency link is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
对于方式三:第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,该第一消息可指示终端设备从第一载波集中最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括(或指示)第三标识和第四标识。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波;或者,从第一载波切换至第三载波,以及从第四载波切换至第二载波。在方式三中,第二切换间隔被配置的载波可以是网络设备指示的,或者也可以是终端设备确定的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。第三切换间隔被配置的载波可以是网络设备指示的,或者也可以是终端设备确定的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。为了便于描述,本申请实施例以网络设备指示第二切换间隔被配置的载波以及第三切换间隔被配置的载波为例。For method three: the first carrier set includes the first carrier and the fourth carrier, and the second carrier set includes the second carrier and the third carrier. The first message may instruct the terminal device to select the minimum TA or the maximum TA from the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes (or indicates) the third identifier and the fourth identifier. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message; or, switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier Switch to the second carrier. In the third method, the carrier for which the second switching interval is configured may be indicated by the network device, or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The carrier configured for the third switching interval may be indicated by the network device, or may be determined by the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. For convenience of description, this embodiment of the present application takes the network device as an example to indicate the carrier in which the second switching interval is configured and the carrier in which the third switching interval is configured.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波;或者,从第一载波切换至第三载波,以及从第四载波切换至第二载波。In a possible implementation, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and the terminal device switches according to the first The message is switched from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or, from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
作为一个示例,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,以及指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第三载波,从第四载波切换至第二载波,该第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第四载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第二切换间隔为第一值以及该第三切换间隔为第一值,如图20所示;或者,终端设备可以该第二切换间隔为第一值以及该第三切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和,如图21所示。As an example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier according to the first message. The second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the third switching interval is configured on the fourth carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 20; or, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the third switching interval is the first value. The third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 21.
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T5通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时隙2的起始时刻通过第三载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T5通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T5通过第三载波传输数据。在方式3_1中,时刻T5是终端设备从第四载波切换至第二载波的完成时刻,如图20、图21所示。 In the above example, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T5. In mode 3_1, time T5 is the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, as shown in Figures 20 and 21.
在图20所示的示例中,第一TA大于第二TA,终端设备从具有相同TA的两个载波间进行切换,且将第二切换间隔和第三切换间隔皆配置为第一值,能够减少终端设备处理复杂度。而在图21所示的示例中,终端设备将第三切换间隔配置为第一值与第二值之和,这样能够为终端设备预留更多的时间调整射频链路。并且,终端设备将第二切换间隔和第三切换间隔配置在载波切换前的载波上,能够避免影响终端设备通过第二载波和第三载波的控制信息的传输,使得网络设备能够及时调度终端设备在第二载波和第三载波上的数据传输。In the example shown in Figure 20, the first TA is greater than the second TA, the terminal equipment switches between two carriers with the same TA, and both the second switching interval and the third switching interval are configured as the first value, so that Reduce terminal device processing complexity. In the example shown in Figure 21, the terminal device configures the third switching interval as the sum of the first value and the second value, which can reserve more time for the terminal device to adjust the radio frequency link. Moreover, the terminal equipment configures the second switching interval and the third switching interval on the carrier before carrier switching, which can avoid affecting the transmission of control information of the terminal equipment through the second carrier and the third carrier, so that the network equipment can schedule the terminal equipment in a timely manner Data transmission on the second and third carriers.
作为一个示例,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,以及指示第二切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第三载波,从第四载波切换至第二载波,该第二切换间隔被配置在第三载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第二载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第二切换间隔为第一值以及该第三切换间隔为第一值,如图22所示;或者,终端设备可以确定该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及该第三切换间隔为第一值,如图23所示。As an example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the third carrier and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier according to the first message. The second switching interval is configured on the third carrier. The third switching interval configured on the second carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in Figure 22; or, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the first value and the first value. The sum of the second value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in FIG. 23 .
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T5通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T5通过第三载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T5通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T5通过第三载波传输数据。在方式3_2中,时刻T4可以位于时刻T5之前,如图22所示;或者,时刻T4也可以为时刻T5,如图23所示。In the above example, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at time T5. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T5, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T5. In mode 3_2, time T4 may be before time T5, as shown in Figure 22; or time T4 may also be time T5, as shown in Figure 23.
在图22所示的示例中,第一TA大于第二TA,终端设备从具有相同TA的两个载波间进行切换,且将第二切换间隔和第三切换间隔皆配置为第一值,能够减少终端设备处理复杂度。而在图23所示的示例中,终端设备将第二切换间隔配置在第三载波上,且该第三切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和,这样可以利用第一TA与第二TA之间的TA差补偿第二载波与第三载波上的传输时延,且无论终端设备是否支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备皆可以同时在第二载波和第三载波上并行传输数据,能够提高数据传输效率。In the example shown in Figure 22, the first TA is greater than the second TA, the terminal device switches between two carriers with the same TA, and both the second switching interval and the third switching interval are configured as the first value, so that Reduce terminal device processing complexity. In the example shown in Figure 23, the terminal device configures the second switching interval on the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value. In this way, the first TA and the second value can be used. The TA difference between TAs compensates for the transmission delay on the second carrier and the third carrier, and regardless of whether the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the handover of one radio frequency link is completed, All terminal devices can transmit data in parallel on the second carrier and the third carrier at the same time, which can improve data transmission efficiency.
作为又一个示例,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波,该第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波上,该第三切换间隔被配置在第四载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及该第三切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,如图24所示。As another example, the first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device Switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is Configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, the second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the third switching The interval is configured on the fourth carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 24 .
在上述示例中,无论终端设备是否支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备皆可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T3通过第三载波传输数据。In the above example, regardless of whether the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and/ Or transmit data through the third carrier at time T3.
在图24所示的示例中,第一TA大于第二TA,终端设备在不同TA对应的两个载波间进行载波切换,将第二切换间隔配置为第一值与第二值之差,能够利用第一载波与第二载波之间的TA差补偿第一载波切换至第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,减少从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。终端设备将第三切换间隔配置为第一值与第二值之和,能够预留更多的时间调整射频链路,且利用第四载波与第三载波之间的TA差补偿第二载波与第三载波之间的传输时延,即终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波的完成时刻与第四载波切换至第三载波的完成时刻可以相等,使得终端设备能够同时通过第二载波和第三载波进行并行传输,提高数据传输效率。In the example shown in Figure 24, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, so that The TA difference between the first carrier and the second carrier is used to compensate for the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, reducing the original time required to interrupt the first value to the time required to interrupt the first value and the second The length of time the terminal device interrupts data transmission on the carrier can be reduced and resource utilization can be improved. The terminal equipment configures the third switching interval as the sum of the first value and the second value, can reserve more time to adjust the radio frequency link, and uses the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the second carrier and the second carrier. The transmission delay between the third carriers, that is, the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the second carrier and the completion time of the fourth carrier switching to the third carrier can be equal, so that the terminal equipment can pass the second carrier and the third carrier at the same time. The third carrier performs parallel transmission to improve data transmission efficiency.
作为又一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第二切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端 设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波,该第二切换间隔被配置在第二载波上,该第三切换间隔被配置在第三载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及该第三切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,如图25所示;或者,终端设备可以确定该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及该第三切换间隔为第一值,如图26所示。As another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device to switch from The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured On the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the terminal According to the first message, the device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier. The second switching interval is configured on the second carrier, and the third switching interval is configured on the third carrier. on the carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in Figure 25; or, the terminal device It can be determined that the second switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value, as shown in FIG. 26 .
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T6通过第三载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T3通过第三载波传输数据。在方式3_2中,时刻T6可以是终端设备从第四载波切换至第三载波的完成时刻。该时刻T6可以位于时刻T3之前,如图25所示;或者,时刻T6也可以为时刻T3,如图26所示。In the above example, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at time T6. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T3. In mode 3_2, time T6 may be the completion time of the terminal device switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier. The time T6 may be before the time T3, as shown in FIG. 25; or the time T6 may also be the time T3, as shown in FIG. 26.
在图25所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备在不同TA对应的两个载波间进行载波切换,将第二切换间隔配置在第二载波上,该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和,能够预留更多的时间调整射频链路。终端设备将第三切换间隔配置在第三载波上,且该第三切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,能够利用第四载波与第三载波之间的TA差补偿第四载波切换至第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,减少从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。In the example shown in Figure 25, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval on the second carrier. The second switching interval is The sum of the first value and the second value can reserve more time to adjust the radio frequency link. The terminal equipment configures the third switching interval on the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, and can use the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the fourth carrier switching. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process of reaching the third carrier is reduced from the length of time that originally needs to interrupt the first value to the length of time that the difference between the first value and the second value needs to be interrupted, thereby reducing the risk of terminal equipment interrupting data transmission on the carrier. time, which can improve resource utilization.
在图26所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备在不同TA对应的两个载波间进行载波切换,将第二切换间隔配置在第二载波上,该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和,能够预留更多的时间调整射频链路。终端设备将第三切换间隔配置在第三载波上,且该第三切换间隔为第一值,能够减少终端设备的处理复杂度,且利用第四载波与第三载波之间的TA差补偿第二载波与第三载波之间的传输时延,即终端设备从第一载波切换至第二载波的完成时刻与第四载波切换至第三载波的完成时刻可以相等,使得终端设备能够同时通过第二载波和第三载波进行并行传输,提高数据传输效率。In the example shown in Figure 26, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval on the second carrier. The second switching interval is The sum of the first value and the second value can reserve more time to adjust the radio frequency link. The terminal equipment configures the third switching interval on the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the first value, which can reduce the processing complexity of the terminal equipment and use the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the third switching interval. The transmission delay between the second carrier and the third carrier, that is, the completion time of the terminal equipment switching from the first carrier to the second carrier and the completion time of the fourth carrier switching to the third carrier, can be equal, so that the terminal equipment can pass the third carrier at the same time. The second carrier and the third carrier are transmitted in parallel to improve data transmission efficiency.
作为再一个示例,第一TA大于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,该第三切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波,该第二切换间隔被配置在第一载波上,该第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第四载波上,以及该第三切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第三载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,该第一部分为第二值以及该剩余部分为第一值,如图27所示。As yet another example, the first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device Switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicate that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, in the third switching interval The first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the third switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, the second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, and the third switching The first part of the interval is configured on the fourth carrier, and the remaining part of the third switching interval except the first part is configured on the third carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the second switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, the first part is the second value and the remaining part is the first value, as shown in FIG. 27 .
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T6通过第三载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T6通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T6通过第三载波传输数据。在方式3_5中,时刻T6位于时刻T3之后,如图27所示。In the above example, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at time T6. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T6, and/or At time T6, data is transmitted via the third carrier. In mode 3_5, time T6 is located after time T3, as shown in Figure 27.
在图27所示的示例中,第一TA大于第二TA,终端设备在不同TA对应的两个载波间进行载波切换,将第二切换间隔配置在第一载波上,该第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,能够利用第一载波与第二载波之间的TA差补偿第一载波切换至第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,减少从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。In the example shown in Figure 27, the first TA is larger than the second TA, the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the second switching interval on the first carrier. The second switching interval is The difference between the first value and the second value can use the TA difference between the first carrier and the second carrier to compensate for the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, reducing the need to interrupt the first value The duration is shortened to the duration of the difference between the first interrupt value and the second value, thereby reducing the duration for the terminal device to interrupt data transmission on the carrier, and improving resource utilization.
作为再一个示例,第一TA小于第二TA,该第一消息指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示终端设备从第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,以及指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,该第二切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔被配置在第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上。在此情况下,终端设备根据该第一消息,从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波,该第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在第一载波上,该第二切换间隔中除了第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在第 二载波上,该第三切换间隔被配置在第四载波上。可选的,终端设备可以确定该第一部分为第二值,该剩余部分为第一值,以及该第三切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,如图28所示。As yet another example, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instructs the terminal device Switching from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and indicating that the first part of the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the The remainder of the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set. In this case, the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier according to the first message, and the first part of the second switching interval is configured on the first carrier, The remainder of the second switching interval except the first part is configured in the On the second carrier, the third switching interval is configured on the fourth carrier. Optionally, the terminal device may determine that the first part is the second value, the remaining part is the first value, and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, as shown in FIG. 28 .
在上述示例中,若信息1指示终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时隙2的起始时刻通过第三载波传输数据。或者,若信息1指示终端设备不支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前通过除了该一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信,终端设备可以在时刻T3通过第二载波传输数据,和/或在时刻T3通过第三载波传输数据。在方式3_6中,时隙2的起始时刻为时刻T6,时刻T3位于时刻T6之后,如图28所示。In the above example, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device can transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and /Or transmit data through the third carrier at the beginning of time slot 2. Alternatively, if the information 1 indicates that the terminal device does not support communication through a radio frequency link other than the radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, the terminal device may transmit data through the second carrier at time T3, and/or Data is transmitted through the third carrier at time T3. In mode 3_6, the starting time of time slot 2 is time T6, and time T3 is located after time T6, as shown in Figure 28.
在图28所示的示例中,第一TA小于第二TA,终端设备在不同TA对应的两个载波间进行载波切换,将第三切换间隔配置在第四载波上,该第三切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,能够利用第四载波与第三载波之间的TA差补偿第四载波切换至第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,减少从原本需要中断第一值的时长缩短到中断第一值与第二值之差的时长,从而能够减少终端设备在载波上中断数据传输的时长,能够提高资源利用率。In the example shown in Figure 28, the first TA is smaller than the second TA, the terminal device performs carrier switching between two carriers corresponding to different TAs, and configures the third switching interval on the fourth carrier. The third switching interval is The difference between the first value and the second value can use the TA difference between the fourth carrier and the third carrier to compensate for the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the fourth carrier to the third carrier, reducing the need to interrupt the first value The duration is shortened to the duration of the difference between the first interrupt value and the second value, thereby reducing the duration for the terminal device to interrupt data transmission on the carrier, and improving resource utilization.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,第一消息包括第三标识和第四标识。例如,第三标识是第一TA的标识,第四标识是第一TA的标识,终端设备根据该第三标识和该第四标识,可以从第一载波切换至第三载波,从第四载波切换至第二载波。例如,第三标识是第一TA的标识,第四标识是第二TA的标识,终端设备根据该第三标识和该第四标识,可以从第一载波切换至第二载波,从第四载波切换至第三载波。又例如,第三标识是第二TA的标识,第四标识是第一TA的标识,终端设备根据该第三标识和该第四标识,可以从第四载波切换至第三载波,从第一载波切换至第二载波。再例如,第三标识是第二TA的标识,第四标识是第二TA的标识,终端设备根据该第三标识和该第四标识,可以从第四载波切换至第二载波,从第一载波切换至第三载波。In yet another possible implementation, the first message includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier. For example, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA. According to the third identifier and the fourth identifier, the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier. Switch to the second carrier. For example, the third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA. According to the third identifier and the fourth identifier, the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. Switch to third carrier. For another example, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA. According to the third identifier and the fourth identifier, the terminal device can switch from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and from the first carrier to the third carrier. The carrier is switched to the second carrier. For another example, the third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA. According to the third identifier and the fourth identifier, the terminal device can switch from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier is switched to the third carrier.
需要说明的是,该第二切换间隔的起始时刻与第三切换间隔的起始时刻可以相同,也可以不同。另外,终端设备在两对载波间切换的起始时刻可以相同也可以不同。例如,终端设备可以同时从第一载波切换至第三载波和从第四载波切换至第二载波;或者,也可以先从第一载波切换至第三载波,再从第四载波切换至第二载波;或者,还可以先从第四载波切换至第二载波,再从第一载波切换至第三载波;或者,还可以在第一载波切换至第三载波的过程中,从第四载波切换至第二载波等。类似的,终端设备可以同时从第一载波切换至第二载波和从第四载波切换至第三载波;或者,也可以先从第一载波切换至第二载波,再从第四载波切换至第三载波;或者,还可以先从第四载波切换至第三载波,再从第一载波切换至第二载波;或者,还可以在第一载波切换至第二载波的过程中,从第四载波切换至第三载波等。It should be noted that the starting time of the second switching interval and the starting time of the third switching interval may be the same or different. In addition, the starting time for the terminal equipment to switch between the two pairs of carriers may be the same or different. For example, the terminal device can switch from the first carrier to the third carrier and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier at the same time; or, it can also switch from the first carrier to the third carrier first, and then from the fourth carrier to the second carrier. carrier; or, you can also switch from the fourth carrier to the second carrier first, and then switch from the first carrier to the third carrier; or, you can also switch from the fourth carrier during the process of switching from the first carrier to the third carrier. to the second carrier and so on. Similarly, the terminal equipment can switch from the first carrier to the second carrier and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier at the same time; or, it can also switch from the first carrier to the second carrier first, and then switch from the fourth carrier to the third carrier. three carriers; or, you can also switch from the fourth carrier to the third carrier first, and then switch from the first carrier to the second carrier; or, you can also switch from the fourth carrier to the second carrier during the process of switching from the first carrier to the second carrier. Switch to third carrier, etc.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备周期性地向网络设备发送第二值。该第二值,又可以称为TA差,是第一TA与第二TA之差例如该第二值可以是第一TA与第二TA之间的差值的绝对值。例如,终端设备可以将第二值作为能力信息周期性地发送给网络设备。其中,终端设备发送第二值的周期值小于或等于第一阈值。该第一阈值是一个较小值,可以是预定义的,或者也可以是终端设备与网络设备预先协商的,或者还可以是网络设备为终端设备配置的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。在本实现方式中,终端设备以较小周期向网络设备上报第二值,这样可以增加终端设备向网络设备上报第二值的频率,减少因终端设备的移动未将更新后的第二值及时发送给网络设备而导致网络设备侧的第二值与终端设备侧的第二值不同的问题,使得网络设备能够及时获取终端设备更新后的第二值。In a possible implementation, the terminal device periodically sends the second value to the network device. The second value, which may also be called the TA difference, is the difference between the first TA and the second TA. For example, the second value may be the absolute value of the difference between the first TA and the second TA. For example, the terminal device may periodically send the second value as capability information to the network device. Wherein, the period value at which the terminal device sends the second value is less than or equal to the first threshold. The first threshold is a small value, which may be predefined, or may be pre-negotiated between the terminal device and the network device, or may be configured by the network device for the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application. In this implementation, the terminal device reports the second value to the network device in a smaller period, which can increase the frequency of the terminal device reporting the second value to the network device and reduce the delay in updating the second value in time due to the movement of the terminal device. The second value sent to the network device causes the second value on the network device side to be different from the second value on the terminal device side, so that the network device can obtain the updated second value of the terminal device in a timely manner.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以周期性地或非周期性地向网络设备发送第二值,并在发送完成之后使用该第二值,如根据该第二值确定第一切换间隔、第二切换间隔或第三切换间隔等。在本实现方式中,终端设备在向网络设备发送完第二值后使用该第二值,这样可以避免终端设备更新第二值后未及时将更新后的第二值发送给网络设备,导致网络设备侧的第二值与终端设备侧的第二值不一致的问题。In another possible implementation, the terminal device can periodically or aperiodically send the second value to the network device, and use the second value after the sending is completed, such as determining the first switching based on the second value. interval, the second switching interval or the third switching interval, etc. In this implementation, the terminal device uses the second value after sending the second value to the network device. This can prevent the terminal device from not sending the updated second value to the network device in time after updating the second value, causing network problems. The second value on the device side is inconsistent with the second value on the terminal device side.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以周期性地或非周期性地向网络设备发送第一指示信息。该第一指示信息可指示第二值所属的TA差取值的一个范围。该第一指示信息可理解为TA差等级(level),或者理解为TA差等级的索引等。在本实现方式中,终端设备向网络设备发送第二值所属的TA差范围,终端设备未及时将更新后的第二值发送给网络设备,该更新后的第二值可以属于该TA差范围,这样能够减少网络设备侧的第二值与终端设备侧更新后的第二值之间的差值,并且能够减少终端设备向网络设备上报第二值的频率,能够节省网络资源。 In yet another possible implementation, the terminal device may send the first indication information to the network device periodically or aperiodically. The first indication information may indicate a range of TA difference values to which the second value belongs. The first indication information can be understood as a TA difference level (level), or as an index of a TA difference level, or the like. In this implementation, the terminal device sends the TA difference range to which the second value belongs to the network device. The terminal device does not send the updated second value to the network device in time. The updated second value may belong to the TA difference range. , this can reduce the difference between the second value on the network device side and the updated second value on the terminal device side, reduce the frequency of the terminal device reporting the second value to the network device, and save network resources.
上述本申请提供的实施例中,分别从网络设备与终端设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能,终端设备或网络设备可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块,以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。In the above-mentioned embodiments provided by the present application, the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application are introduced from the perspective of interaction between network devices and terminal devices. In order to implement each function in the method provided by the above embodiments of the present application, the terminal device or network device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module to implement the above functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. .
图29和图30为本申请的实施例提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。该通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请的实施例中,该通信装置可以是如图1所示的终端设备120a-120j中的一个,也可以是如图1所示的网络设备110a或110b,还可以是应用于终端设备或网络设备的模块(如芯片)。Figures 29 and 30 are schematic structural diagrams of possible communication devices provided by embodiments of the present application. The communication device can be used to implement the functions of the terminal equipment or network equipment in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device may be one of the terminal devices 120a-120j as shown in Figure 1, or may be the network device 110a or 110b as shown in Figure 1, or may be applied to the terminal device. Or modules of network equipment (such as chips).
如图29所示,通信装置2900包括处理模块2901和收发模块2902。通信装置2900用于实现上述图3至图28任一项所示的方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备的功能。As shown in Figure 29, the communication device 2900 includes a processing module 2901 and a transceiver module 2902. The communication device 2900 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device or network device in the method embodiment shown in any one of the above-mentioned Figures 3 to 28.
如果通信装置2900用于实现上述图3至图28任一项所示的方法实施例中终端设备的功能,作为一个示例,收发模块2902,用于接收来自网络设备的第一消息,以及处理模块2901,用于根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集;其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或包括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。If the communication device 2900 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in any one of Figure 3 to Figure 28, as an example, the transceiver module 2902 is used to receive the first message from the network device, and the processing module 2901, used to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, and the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier , the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum time advance TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a first identifier, the first The identifier is the identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message Instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and/or include a second identifier, where the second identifier is in the first carrier set The identification of a TA corresponding to one carrier; or, the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device Switching from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or including a third identifier and a fourth identifier, the third The identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set, and the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; wherein the first carrier corresponds to the first TA , the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
作为另一个示例,该收发模块2902,可用于向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:As another example, the transceiver module 2902 may be used to send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
所述终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在所述两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,所述两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整;Whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,是否支持等待除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过所述一条射频链路进行通信;Or, after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, whether the terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link after waiting for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换;Or, the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输,所述第三值是终端设备支持的在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长;Or, whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
或者,终端设备是否支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段,其中,所述第一频段是载波切换前的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换前的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段,所述第二频段是载波切换后的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换后的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located. One or more frequency bands, the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持被配置回退频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a configured fallback frequency band;
或者,所述终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持响应探测参考信号载波切换。Or, when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
如果通信装置2900用于实现上述图3至图28任一项所示的方法实施例中终端设备的功能,作为一个示例,处理模块2901,用于为终端设备配置第一TA和第二TA,以及收发模块2902,用于向所述终端设备发送第一消息;其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或包括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或包括第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第 四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。If the communication device 2900 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in any one of Figure 3 to Figure 28, as an example, the processing module 2901 is used to configure the first TA and the second TA for the terminal device, and a transceiver module 2902, configured to send a first message to the terminal device; wherein the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message Instruct the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to a carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or include a first identifier, and the first identifier is a carrier in the second carrier set. The identification of the TA corresponding to one carrier; or, the first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes the first carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to obtain the first carrier from the third carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in a carrier set is switched to the first carrier, and/or includes a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or , the first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects the smallest carrier from the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the TA or the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or includes a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is in the first carrier set. The identification of the TA corresponding to a carrier, the first The fourth identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to one carrier in the second carrier set; wherein the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, and the third carrier corresponds to the third A TA, the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
作为另一个示例,收发模块2902,可用于接收来自终端设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:As another example, the transceiving module 2902 may be configured to receive a second message from the terminal device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
所述终端设备是否支持在不同时刻在两个载波发送数据的情况下,在所述两个载波中的一个载波发送期间,所述两个载波中的另外一个载波已完成射频链路的调整;Whether the terminal device supports sending data on two carriers at different times, and during the transmission of one of the two carriers, the other of the two carriers has completed the adjustment of the radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成之后,是否支持等待除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路切换完成之后通过所述一条射频链路进行通信;Or, after the switching of one radio frequency link is completed, whether the terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link after waiting for the completion of switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link;
或者,所述终端设备支持在不同TA对应的多个载波间进行切换;Or, the terminal equipment supports switching between multiple carriers corresponding to different TAs;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持根据第三值在多个载波上并行传输,所述第三值是终端设备支持的在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长;Or, whether the terminal device supports parallel transmission on multiple carriers according to a third value, where the third value is the duration of adjusting the radio frequency link between two carriers supported by the terminal device;
或者,终端设备是否支持第一频段与第二频段之间存在共有的频段,其中,所述第一频段是载波切换前的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换前的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段,所述第二频段是载波切换后的一个载波所在的一个频段,或者为载波切换后的多个载波所在的一个或多个频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a shared frequency band between the first frequency band and the second frequency band, where the first frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier before carrier switching is located, or is a frequency band where multiple carriers before carrier switching are located. One or more frequency bands, the second frequency band is a frequency band where one carrier after carrier switching is located, or one or more frequency bands where multiple carriers after carrier switching are located;
或者,所述终端设备是否支持被配置回退频段;Or, whether the terminal device supports a configured fallback frequency band;
或者,所述终端设备在多个频段间切换时,是否支持响应探测参考信号载波切换。Or, when the terminal equipment switches between multiple frequency bands, whether it supports carrier switching in response to the sounding reference signal.
有关上述处理模块2901和收发模块2902更详细的描述可以直接参考图3至图28中任一项所示的方法实施例中相关描述直接得到,这里不加赘述。More detailed descriptions about the above-mentioned processing module 2901 and transceiver module 2902 can be directly obtained by referring to the relevant descriptions in the method embodiments shown in any one of Figures 3 to 28, and will not be described again here.
如图30所示,通信装置3000包括处理器3010。可选地,通信装置3000还可以包括通信接口3020(图30中以虚线表示)。处理器3010和通信接口3020之间相互耦合。可以理解的是,通信接口3020可以为收发器或输入输出接口。可选地,通信装置3000还可以包括存储器3030(图30中以虚线表示),用于存储处理器3010执行的指令或存储处理器3010运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器3010运行指令后产生的数据。可选地,存储器3030、处理器3010以及通信接口3020通过总线3040相连。本申请实施例中,指令也可以指代计算机程序,代码,程序代码,程序,应用程序,软件,或者,可执行文件。As shown in FIG. 30 , communication device 3000 includes processor 3010 . Optionally, the communication device 3000 may also include a communication interface 3020 (indicated by a dotted line in Figure 30). The processor 3010 and the communication interface 3020 are coupled to each other. It can be understood that the communication interface 3020 may be a transceiver or an input-output interface. Optionally, the communication device 3000 may also include a memory 3030 (indicated by a dotted line in Figure 30) for storing instructions executed by the processor 3010 or input data required for the processor 3010 to run the instructions or storage after the processor 3010 executes the instructions. generated data. Optionally, the memory 3030, the processor 3010 and the communication interface 3020 are connected through a bus 3040. In the embodiments of this application, instructions may also refer to computer programs, codes, program codes, programs, applications, software, or executable files.
当通信装置3000用于实现图3至图28中任一项所示的方法时,处理器3010用于实现上述处理模块2901的功能,通信接口3020用于实现上述收发模块2902的功能。When the communication device 3000 is used to implement the method shown in any one of Figures 3 to 28, the processor 3010 is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned processing module 2901, and the communication interface 3020 is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned transceiver module 2902.
当上述通信装置为应用于终端设备的芯片时,该终端设备芯片实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。该终端设备芯片从终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的;或者,该终端设备芯片向终端设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的。When the above communication device is a chip applied to a terminal device, the terminal device chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiment. The terminal equipment chip receives information from other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the terminal equipment, and the information is sent by the network equipment to the terminal equipment; or, the terminal equipment chip sends information to other modules (such as radio frequency modules or antennas) in the terminal equipment. Antenna) sends information, which is sent by the terminal device to the network device.
当上述通信装置为应用于网络设备的模块时,该网络设备模块实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。该网络设备模块从网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收信息,该信息是终端设备发送给网络设备的;或者,该网络设备模块向网络设备中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)发送信息,该信息是网络设备发送给终端设备的。这里的网络设备模块可以是网络设备的基带芯片,也可以是DU或其他模块,这里的DU可以是开放式无线接入网(open radio access network,O-RAN)架构下的DU。When the above communication device is a module applied to a network device, the network device module implements the functions of the network device in the above method embodiment. The network device module receives information from other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or antenna), which is sent by the terminal device to the network device; or, the network device module sends information to other modules in the network device (such as a radio frequency module or antenna). Antenna) sends information, which is sent by the network device to the terminal device. The network equipment module here can be the baseband chip of the network equipment, or it can be a DU or other module. The DU here can be a DU under the open radio access network (open radio access network, O-RAN) architecture.
可以理解的是,本申请的实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件,硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器,也可以是任何常规的处理器。It can be understood that the processor in the embodiment of the present application can be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), or application-specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof. A general-purpose processor can be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现,也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性地存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于网络设备或终端设备中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于网络设备或终端设备中。 The method steps in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by hardware or by a processor executing software instructions. Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and the software modules can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory In memory, register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or any other form of storage medium well known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from the storage medium and write information to the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor. The processor and storage media may be located in an ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC can be located in network equipment or terminal equipment. Of course, the processor and the storage medium can also exist as discrete components in network equipment or terminal equipment.
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或指令被运行时,实现前述方法实施例中由网络设备或终端设备所执行的方法。这样,上述实施例中所述功能可以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器ROM、随机存取存储器RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。This application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are run, the steps executed by the network device or the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments are implemented. method. In this way, the functions described in the above embodiments can be implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or contributes to the technical solution or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes a number of instructions. So that a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) executes all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application. Storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory ROM, random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行前述任一方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。This application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes: computer program code. When the computer program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute any of the foregoing method embodiments executed by a terminal device or a network device. Methods.
本申请还提供一种系统,其包括终端设备和/或网络设备。This application also provides a system, which includes a terminal device and/or a network device.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例所涉及的终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。Embodiments of the present application also provide a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method executed by the terminal device or network device involved in any of the above method embodiments.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘;还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘。该计算机可读存储介质可以是易失性或非易失性存储介质,或可包括易失性和非易失性两种类型的存储介质。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are executed in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or other programmable device. The computer program or instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another. For example, the computer program or instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits via wired or wireless means to another website site, computer, server, or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media, such as floppy disks, hard disks, and magnetic tapes; optical media, such as digital video optical disks; or semiconductor media, such as solid-state hard disks. The computer-readable storage medium may be volatile or nonvolatile storage media, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile types of storage media.
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of this application, if there are no special instructions or logical conflicts, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referenced to each other. The technical features in different embodiments are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments.
此外,本申请实施例中,信息(information),信号(signal),消息(message),信道(channel)有时可以混用,应当指出的是,在不强调其区别时,其所要表达的含义是一致的。“的(of)”,“相应的(corresponding,relevant)”和“对应的(corresponding)”有时可以混用,应当指出的是,在不强调其区别时,其所要表达的含义是一致的。In addition, in the embodiments of this application, information (information), signal (signal), message (message), and channel (channel) can sometimes be used interchangeably. It should be noted that when the difference is not emphasized, the meanings they intend to express are the same. of. "Of", "corresponding, relevant" and "corresponding" can sometimes be used interchangeably. It should be noted that when the difference is not emphasized, the meanings they convey are consistent.
可以理解的是,在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。 It can be understood that the various numerical numbers involved in the embodiments of the present application are only for convenience of description and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The size of the serial numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic.

Claims (92)

  1. 一种载波切换方法,其特征在于,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:A carrier switching method, characterized in that it is applied to terminal equipment, and the method includes:
    接收来自网络设备的第一消息;receiving the first message from the network device;
    根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集;According to the first message, switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum timing advance TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or ,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indicates a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set;
    所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波或切换至所述第三载波。Switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 2, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,或者为第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值,或者为第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first The switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the largest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. On the carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that, switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第一标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中 的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波;The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the first message instructs the terminal device to collect data from the first carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or maximum TA is switched to the first carrier;
    所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    从所述第二载波或所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波。Switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 5, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval to be a first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching. The method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value and a first value. The difference between two values; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part as a first value and the remaining part as the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after the carrier switching. On the carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  7. 根据权利要求1、5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The method according to claim 1, 5 or 6, characterized in that, switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波;或者,The second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the third carrier to the first carrier; or,
    所述第二标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第二载波切换至所述第一载波。The second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, which is switched from the second carrier to the first carrier.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The method of claim 1, wherein the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the first carrier set to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA;
    所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,Switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波。Handover from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 8, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. The method further includes: determining that the second switching interval is the first The value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the first value and the third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者, The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The method further includes: determining that the second switching interval is the first The value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval are the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and The third switching interval is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,所述第一部分为所述第二值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and in the third switching interval except the The remaining part except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. The method further includes: determining the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the A first portion is the second value and the remaining portion is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值,所述剩余部分为第一值,以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part as a second value, the remaining part as a first value, and The third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;其中,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process of switching to the second carrier; wherein the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the first The difference between TA and the second TA.
  10. 根据权利要求1、8、或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The method according to claim 1, 8, or 9, characterized in that, according to the first message, switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set includes:
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier.
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that the method further includes:
    向所述网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者, The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed and the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, characterized in that the method further includes:
    接收来自所述网络设备的所述第一TA和所述第二TA。The first TA and the second TA are received from the network device.
  13. 一种载波切换方法,其特征在于,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A carrier switching method, characterized in that it is applied to network equipment, and the method includes:
    为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA;Configure the first time advance TA and the second TA for the terminal device;
    向所述终端设备发送第一消息;Send a first message to the terminal device;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indication includes a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第二载波对应于所述第二TA,所述第三载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第四载波对应于所述第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the The second TA.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 13, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first The switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the largest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. on the carrier;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that the first identification is the identification of the first TA or the identification of the second TA.
  16. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 13, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or on the carrier after carrier switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载 波切换后的载波上;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier. on the carrier after wave switching;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  17. 根据权利要求13或16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。The method according to claim 13 or 16, characterized in that the second identification is the identification of the first TA or the identification of the second TA.
  18. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 13, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and in the third switching interval except the The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
  19. 根据权利要求13或18所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 13 or 18, characterized in that,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识。The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
  20. 根据权利要求13至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括: The method according to any one of claims 13 to 19, characterized in that the method further includes:
    接收来自所述终端设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Receive a second message from the terminal device, the second message including one or more of the following information:
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed and the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述终端设备发送第一消息,包括:The method according to claim 20, wherein sending the first message to the terminal device includes:
    根据所述第二消息,所述第一TA和所述第二TA,向所述终端设备发送所述第一消息。According to the second message, the first TA and the second TA send the first message to the terminal device.
  22. 根据权利要求13至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA,包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 21, characterized in that configuring the first time advance TA and the second time advance TA for the terminal device includes:
    向所述终端设备发送所述第一TA和所述第二TA。Send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  23. 一种载波切换方法,其特征在于,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:A carrier switching method, characterized in that it is applied to terminal equipment, and the method includes:
    向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed and the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 23, further comprising:
    接收来自所述网络设备的第一消息;receiving a first message from the network device;
    根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集;According to the first message, switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum timing advance TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or ,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indicates a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The method according to claim 24, wherein the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set;
    所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波或切换至所述第三载波。Switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 25, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,或者为第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述方 法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值,或者为第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first The switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching. The method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the largest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. On the carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  27. 根据权利要求24至26中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The method according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第一标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  28. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波;The method according to claim 24, wherein the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set;
    所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    从所述第二载波或所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波。Switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 28, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, and the method further includes: determining the first switching interval to be a first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching. The method further includes: determining that the first switching interval is a first value and a first value. The difference between two values; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part as a first value and the remaining part as the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after the carrier switching. On the carrier, the method further includes: determining the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determining the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the terminal equipment adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  30. 根据权利要求24、28或29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The method according to claim 24, 28 or 29, characterized in that, switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波;或者,The second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the third carrier to the first carrier; or,
    所述第二标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第二载波切换至所述第一载波。The second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, which is switched from the second carrier to the first carrier.
  31. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集 中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The method according to claim 24, characterized in that the first message instructs the terminal device to select the terminal device from the first carrier set. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set;
    所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,Switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波。Handover from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 31, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. The method further includes: determining that the second switching interval is the first The value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the first value and the third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The method further includes: determining that the second switching interval is the first The value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the method further includes: determining the second switching interval to The sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval are the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and The third switching interval is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,所述第一部分为所述第二值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and in the third switching interval except the The remaining part except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. The method further includes: determining the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the A first portion is the second value and the remaining portion is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述方法还包括:确定所述第一部分为第二值,所述剩余部分为第一值,以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the method further includes: determining the first part as a second value, the remaining part as a first value, and The third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔 是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;其中,所述第一值是所述终端设备在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the fourth carrier to the second carrier; Wherein, the first value is the duration for the terminal device to adjust the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  33. 根据权利要求24、31、或32所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集,包括:The method according to claim 24, 31, or 32, wherein the switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message includes:
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier.
  34. 根据权利要求24至33中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 24 to 33, characterized in that the method further includes:
    接收来自所述网络设备的所述第一TA和所述第二TA。The first TA and the second TA are received from the network device.
  35. 一种载波切换方法,其特征在于,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A carrier switching method, characterized in that it is applied to network equipment, and the method includes:
    接收来自终端设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Receive a second message from the terminal device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed and the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 35, further comprising:
    为所述终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA;Configuring a first time advance TA and a second time advance TA for the terminal device;
    向所述终端设备发送第一消息;Send a first message to the terminal device;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indication includes a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第二载波对应于所述第二TA,所述第三载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第四载波对应于所述第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the The second TA.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 36, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first The switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二 载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the carrier set, the first message also indicates that the first part in the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the first part in the first switching interval except the first part The remaining part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
  38. 根据权利要求36或37所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。The method according to claim 36 or 37, characterized in that the first identification is the identification of the first TA or the identification of the second TA.
  39. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 36, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or on the carrier after carrier switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after the carrier switching. on the carrier;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  40. 根据权利要求36或39所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。The method according to claim 36 or 39, characterized in that the second identification is the identification of the first TA or the identification of the second TA.
  41. 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 36, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中 的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to collect from the first carrier The carrier corresponding to the largest TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set. The first part of the three switching intervals is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the third switching interval except the first part is configured on the second carrier on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the concentration; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
  42. 根据权利要求36或41所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 36 or 41, characterized in that,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识。The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
  43. 根据权利要求36至42中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述终端设备发送第一消息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 36 to 42, characterized in that sending the first message to the terminal device includes:
    根据所述第二消息,所述第一TA和所述第二TA,向所述终端设备发送所述第一消息。According to the second message, the first TA and the second TA send the first message to the terminal device.
  44. 根据权利要求36至43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA,包括:The method according to any one of claims 36 to 43, characterized in that configuring the first time advance TA and the second time advance TA for the terminal device includes:
    向所述终端设备发送所述第一TA和所述第二TA。Send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  45. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理模块和收发模块;A communication device, characterized by including a processing module and a transceiver module;
    其中,所述收发模块,用于接收来自网络设备的第一消息;Wherein, the transceiver module is used to receive the first message from the network device;
    所述处理模块,用于根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集;The processing module is configured to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum timing advance TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or ,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the communication device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indicates a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the communication device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The device according to claim 45, wherein the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set;
    在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:When switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波或切换至所述第三载波。Switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier.
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 46, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二 载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,或者为第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the communication device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the carrier set, the first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value and The difference between the second value, or the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值,或者为第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first The switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the largest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. On the carrier, the processing module is further configured to: determine the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determine the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述通信装置在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the communication device adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  48. 根据权利要求45至47中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:The device according to any one of claims 45 to 47, wherein when switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第一标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  49. 根据权利要求45所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波;The device according to claim 45, wherein the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier;
    在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:When switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    从所述第二载波或所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波。Switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 49, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after carrier switching, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value The difference from the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first part is a first value and the remaining part is the difference between the first value and the second value; or ,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after the carrier switching. On the carrier, the processing module is further configured to: determine the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determine the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述通信装置在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the communication device adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  51. 根据权利要求45、49或50所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切 换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:The device according to claim 45, 49 or 50, characterized in that, according to the first message, switching from the first carrier set When switching to the second carrier set, the processing module is specifically used to:
    所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波;或者,The second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the third carrier to the first carrier; or,
    所述第二标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第二载波切换至所述第一载波。The second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, which is switched from the second carrier to the first carrier.
  52. 根据权利要求45所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The device according to claim 45, wherein the first message instructs the communication device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the first carrier set to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA;
    在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:When switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,Switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波。Handover from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 52, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. The processing module is further configured to: determine that the second switching interval is The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the first value and the third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value; or ,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The processing module is further configured to: determine that the second switching interval is The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value; or ,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value. and the third switching interval is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,所述第一部分为所述第二值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and in the third switching interval except the The remaining part except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the processing module is further configured to: determine the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the first portion is the second value and the remaining portion is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配 置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第二值,所述剩余部分为第一值,以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured placed on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine the first part as a second value, the remaining part as a first value, and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;其中,所述第一值是所述通信装置在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process of switching to the second carrier; wherein the first value is the length of time the communication device adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the first The difference between TA and the second TA.
  54. 根据权利要求45、52、或53所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:The device according to claim 45, 52, or 53, wherein when switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier.
  55. 根据权利要求45至54中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块进一步用于:The device according to any one of claims 45 to 54, characterized in that the transceiver module is further used for:
    向所述网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
    所述通信装置支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The communication device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述通信装置支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The communication device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述通信装置在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The communication device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed but the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  56. 根据权利要求45至55中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块进一步用于:The device according to any one of claims 45 to 55, characterized in that the transceiver module is further used for:
    接收来自所述网络设备的所述第一TA和所述第二TA。The first TA and the second TA are received from the network device.
  57. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括收发模块和处理模块;A communication device, characterized by including a transceiver module and a processing module;
    其中,所述处理模块,用于为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA;Wherein, the processing module is used to configure the first time advance TA and the second TA for the terminal device;
    所述收发模块,用于向所述终端设备发送第一消息;The transceiver module is used to send a first message to the terminal device;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indication includes a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第二载波对应于所述第二TA,所述第三载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第四载波对应于所述第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the The second TA.
  58. 根据权利要求57所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 57, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波 集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message indicates that the terminal device switches from the first carrier to the second carrier. The first message also indicates that the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the largest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. on the carrier;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
  59. 根据权利要求57或58所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。The device according to claim 57 or 58, wherein the first identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  60. 根据权利要求57所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 57, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or on the carrier after carrier switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after the carrier switching. on the carrier;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  61. 根据权利要求57或60所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。The device according to claim 57 or 60, characterized in that the second identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  62. 根据权利要求57所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 57, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集 中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the second carrier set on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in ; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and in the third switching interval except the The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
  63. 根据权利要求57或62所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 57 or 62, characterized in that:
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识。The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
  64. 根据权利要求57至63中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块进一步用于:The device according to any one of claims 57 to 63, characterized in that the transceiver module is further used for:
    接收来自所述终端设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Receive a second message from the terminal device, the second message including one or more of the following information:
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed and the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的装置,其特征在于,在向所述终端设备发送第一消息时,所述收发模块具体用于:The device according to claim 64, wherein when sending the first message to the terminal device, the transceiver module is specifically configured to:
    根据所述第二消息,所述第一TA和所述第二TA,向所述终端设备发送所述第一消息。According to the second message, the first TA and the second TA send the first message to the terminal device.
  66. 根据权利要求57至65中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA时,所述收发模块还用于:The device according to any one of claims 57 to 65, characterized in that when configuring the first time advance TA and the second time advance TA for the terminal device, the transceiver module is also used to:
    向所述终端设备发送所述第一TA和所述第二TA。Send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  67. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括收发模块;A communication device, characterized by including a transceiver module;
    其中,所述收发模块,用于向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Wherein, the transceiver module is used to send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
    所述通信装置支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The communication device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述通信装置支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The communication device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述通信装置在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The communication device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed but the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  68. 根据权利要求67所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置还包括处理模块;The device according to claim 67, wherein the communication device further includes a processing module;
    其中,所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述网络设备的第一消息;Wherein, the transceiver module is also used to receive the first message from the network device;
    所述处理模块,用于根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集;The processing module is configured to switch from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指 示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小时间提前量TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message refers to Indicates that the communication device switches from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum time advance TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the communication device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indicates a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the communication device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于第一TA,所述第二载波对应于第二TA,所述第三载波对应于第一TA,所述第四载波对应于第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the second TA.
  69. 根据权利要求68所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The device according to claim 68, wherein the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set;
    在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:When switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波或切换至所述第三载波。Switching from the first carrier to the second carrier or to the third carrier.
  70. 根据权利要求69所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 69, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,或者为第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值,或者为第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first The switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value, or the sum of the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the largest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. On the carrier, the processing module is further configured to: determine the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determine the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述通信装置在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the communication device adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  71. 根据权利要求68至70中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:The device according to any one of claims 68 to 70, wherein when switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The first identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第一标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The first identifier is the identifier of the second TA, and the first carrier is switched to the second carrier.
  72. 根据权利要求68所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至第一载波;The device according to claim 68, wherein the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier;
    在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:When switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    从所述第二载波或所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波。Switching from the second carrier or the third carrier to the first carrier.
  73. 根据权利要求72所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 72, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小 TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured to be the smallest in the first carrier set On the carrier corresponding to the TA, or configured on the carrier after carrier switching, the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching, and the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first switching interval is a first value The difference from the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值与第二值之差;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first part is a first value and the remaining part is the difference between the first value and the second value; or ,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第二值以及所述剩余部分为第一值,或者确定所述第一部分为第一值以及所述剩余部分为第二值;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after the carrier switching. On the carrier, the processing module is further configured to: determine the first part to be a second value and the remaining part to be a first value, or determine the first part to be a first value and the remaining part to be a second value;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第一值是所述通信装置在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process of the two carriers, the first value is the length of time the communication device adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the The difference between the first TA and the second TA.
  74. 根据权利要求68、72或73所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:The device according to claim 68, 72 or 73, wherein when switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第三载波切换至所述第一载波;或者,The second identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the third carrier to the first carrier; or,
    所述第二标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第二载波切换至所述第一载波。The second identifier is the identifier of the second TA, which is switched from the second carrier to the first carrier.
  75. 根据权利要求68所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波;The device according to claim 68, wherein the first message instructs the communication device to switch from a carrier corresponding to the smallest TA or the largest TA in the first carrier set to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA;
    在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:When switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,Switch from the first carrier to the second carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波。Handover from the first carrier to the third carrier, and from the fourth carrier to the second carrier.
  76. 根据权利要求75所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 75, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与第二值之和;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set. The processing module is further configured to: determine that the second switching interval is The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the first value and the third switching interval is the sum of the first value and the second value; or ,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the The third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The processing module is further configured to: determine that the second switching interval is The first value and the third switching interval are the first value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the first value; or ,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;或者, The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差,或者确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之和以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine the second switching The interval is the sum of the first value and the second value and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value, or the second switching interval is determined to be the sum of the first value and the second value. and the third switching interval is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第二切换间隔为第一值与第二值之差,所述第一部分为所述第二值以及所述剩余部分为所述第一值;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and in the third switching interval except the The remaining part except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the processing module is further configured to: determine the second switching interval as the difference between the first value and the second value, the first portion is the second value and the remaining portion is the first value; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述通信装置从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,所述处理模块进一步用于:确定所述第一部分为第二值,所述剩余部分为第一值,以及所述第三切换间隔为所述第一值与所述第二值之差;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the communication device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the processing module is further configured to: determine that the first part is a second value, and the remaining part is a first value , and the third switching interval is the difference between the first value and the second value;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;其中,所述第一值是所述通信装置在两个载波间调整射频链路的时长,所述第二值是所述第一TA与所述第二TA之间的差值。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process of switching to the second carrier; wherein the first value is the length of time the communication device adjusts the radio frequency link between the two carriers, and the second value is the first The difference between TA and the second TA.
  77. 根据权利要求68、75、或76所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一消息,从第一载波集切换至第二载波集时,所述处理模块具体用于:The device according to claim 68, 75, or 76, wherein when switching from the first carrier set to the second carrier set according to the first message, the processing module is specifically configured to:
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the first carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识,从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波,以及从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波;或者,The third identifier is the identifier of the first TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the second TA, switching from the first carrier to the second carrier, and switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识,从所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波,以及从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波。The third identifier is the identifier of the second TA, the fourth identifier is the identifier of the first TA, switching from the fourth carrier to the third carrier, and switching from the first carrier to the second carrier.
  78. 根据权利要求68至77中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块进一步用于:The device according to any one of claims 68 to 77, characterized in that the transceiver module is further used for:
    接收来自所述网络设备的所述第一TA和所述第二TA。The first TA and the second TA are received from the network device.
  79. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括收发模块;A communication device, characterized by including a transceiver module;
    其中,所述收发模块,用于接收来自终端设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括如下信息中的一种或多种:Wherein, the transceiver module is used to receive a second message from the terminal device, where the second message includes one or more of the following information:
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换完成之前,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link before the switching of one radio frequency link is completed; or,
    所述终端设备支持在一条射频链路切换过程中,通过除了所述一条射频链路之外的射频链路进行通信;或者,The terminal device supports communication through a radio frequency link other than the one radio frequency link during a radio frequency link switching process; or,
    所述终端设备在一条射频链路切换完成,除了所述一条射频链路之外的其它射频链路未切换完成的情况下,支持通过所述一条射频链路进行通信。The terminal device supports communication through the one radio frequency link when the switching of one radio frequency link is completed and the switching of other radio frequency links except the one radio frequency link is not completed.
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置还包括处理模块; The device according to claim 79, wherein the communication device further includes a processing module;
    其中,所述处理模块,用于为所述终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA;Wherein, the processing module is used to configure a first time advance TA and a second time advance TA for the terminal device;
    所述收发模块,还用于向所述终端设备发送第一消息;The transceiver module is also used to send a first message to the terminal device;
    其中,所述第一载波集包括第一载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第一标识,所述第一标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,Wherein, the first carrier set includes a first carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the second carrier. The carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a first identifier, and the first identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第二载波集包括第一载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,和/或所述第一消息指示括第二标识,所述第二标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;或者,The first carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, the second carrier set includes a first carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device corresponds to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set. The carrier is switched to the first carrier, and/or the first message indication includes a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the TA corresponding to a carrier in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一载波集包括第一载波和第四载波,所述第二载波集包括第二载波和第三载波,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波,和/或所述第一消息指示第三标识和第四标识,所述第三标识是所述第一载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二载波集中的一个载波对应的TA的标识;The first carrier set includes a first carrier and a fourth carrier, the second carrier set includes a second carrier and a third carrier, and the first message indicates that the terminal device selects a minimum TA from the first carrier set. Or the carrier corresponding to the maximum TA is switched to the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the second carrier set, and/or the first message indicates a third identifier and a fourth identifier, and the third identifier is the third identifier. An identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in a carrier set, where the fourth identifier is an identifier of a TA corresponding to a carrier in the second carrier set;
    其中,所述第一载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第二载波对应于所述第二TA,所述第三载波对应于所述第一TA,所述第四载波对应于所述第二TA。Wherein, the first carrier corresponds to the first TA, the second carrier corresponds to the second TA, the third carrier corresponds to the first TA, and the fourth carrier corresponds to the The second TA.
  81. 根据权利要求80所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 80, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在载波切换前的载波上,或者被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first The switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, or on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在载波切换前的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the first carrier to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier before carrier switching, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the largest TA corresponding to the second carrier set. on the carrier;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是两个载波切换过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching process between two carriers.
  82. 根据权利要求80或81所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。The device according to claim 80 or 81, characterized in that the first identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  83. 根据权利要求80所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 80, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,或被配置在载波切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, or on the carrier after carrier switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,或被配置在切换后的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, or is configured on the carrier after switching; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及,所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch to the first carrier from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set, and the first The message also indicates that the first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波,所述第一消息还指示第一切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第一切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在载波切换后的载波上;The first TA is larger than the second TA, the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier, and the first message also indicates The first part of the first switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part of the first switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier after the carrier switching. on the carrier;
    其中,所述第一切换间隔是所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA或最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第一载波的时长。Wherein, the first switching interval is a time period for the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the minimum TA or the maximum TA in the first carrier set to the first carrier.
  84. 根据权利要求80或83所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二标识是所述第一TA的标识,或者是所述第二TA的标识。 The device according to claim 80 or 83, characterized in that the second identification is an identification of the first TA or an identification of the second TA.
  85. 根据权利要求80所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 80, characterized in that:
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is greater than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and/ Or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in the on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA大于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,第三切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,以及所述第三切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;或者,The first TA is larger than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set. The first message also indicates that the second switching interval is configured in On the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set, the first part of the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and in the third switching interval except the The remaining part other than the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set; or,
    所述第一TA小于所述第二TA,所述第一消息指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波,和/或指示所述终端设备从所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波切换至所述第二载波集中的最小TA对应的载波,所述第一消息还指示第二切换间隔中的第一部分被配置在所述第一载波集中的最小TA对应的载波上,所述第二切换间隔中除了所述第一部分之外的剩余部分被配置在所述第二载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上,以及第三切换间隔被配置在所述第一载波集中的最大TA对应的载波上;The first TA is smaller than the second TA, and the first message instructs the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set, and/or instruct the terminal device to switch from the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set to the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the second carrier set, and the first message also indicates the first message in the second switching interval. A part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the smallest TA in the first carrier set, and the remaining part in the second switching interval except the first part is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the second carrier set. on, and the third switching interval is configured on the carrier corresponding to the largest TA in the first carrier set;
    其中,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长;或者,所述第二切换间隔是所述第一载波切换至所述第三载波的过程中载波被中断的时长,所述第三切换间隔是所述第四载波切换至所述第二载波的过程中载波被中断的时长。Wherein, the second switching interval is the duration during which the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the second carrier, and the third switching interval is the duration during which the fourth carrier switches to the third carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during the process; or, the second switching interval is the length of time the carrier is interrupted during the switching of the first carrier to the third carrier, and the third switching interval is the length of the fourth carrier. The length of time the carrier is interrupted during switching to the second carrier.
  86. 根据权利要求80或85所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 80 or 85, characterized in that:
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第一TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第二TA的标识;或者,The third identification is the identification of the first TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the second TA; or,
    所述第三标识是所述第二TA的标识,所述第四标识是所述第一TA的标识。The third identification is the identification of the second TA, and the fourth identification is the identification of the first TA.
  87. 根据权利要求80至86中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在向所述终端设备发送第一消息时,所述收发模块具体用于:The device according to any one of claims 80 to 86, wherein when sending the first message to the terminal device, the transceiver module is specifically used to:
    根据所述第二消息,所述第一TA和所述第二TA,向所述终端设备发送所述第一消息。According to the second message, the first TA and the second TA send the first message to the terminal device.
  88. 根据权利要求80至87中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在为终端设备配置第一时间提前量TA和第二TA时,所述收发模块还用于:The device according to any one of claims 80 to 87, characterized in that when configuring the first time advance TA and the second time advance TA for the terminal device, the transceiver module is also used to:
    向所述终端设备发送所述第一TA和所述第二TA。 Send the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  89. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括如权利要求45至56中任一项所述的通信装置,和/或,包括如权利要求57至66中任一项所述的通信装置;或者包括如权利要求67至78中任一项所述的通信装置,和/或,包括如权利要求79至88中任一项所述的通信装置。A communication system, characterized by including the communication device according to any one of claims 45 to 56, and/or including the communication device according to any one of claims 57 to 66; or including The communication device according to any one of claims 67 to 78, and/or comprising the communication device according to any one of claims 79 to 88.
  90. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器;其中,所述存储器用于存储一个或多个计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器存储的所述一个或多个计算机程序或指令,以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求13至22中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求23至34中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求35至44中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store one or more computer programs or instructions, and the processor is used to execute the one or more computers stored in the memory. Programs or instructions to cause the communication device to perform the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 12, or to perform the method as described in any one of claims 13 to 22, or to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 23 to 22. The method of any one of claims 34, or performing the method of any one of claims 35 to 44.
  91. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,存储有计算机程序或指令,所述计算机程序或指令用于实现权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法,或实现权利要求13至22中任一项所述的方法,或实现权利要求23至34中任一项所述的方法,或实现权利要求35至44中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that computer programs or instructions are stored, and the computer programs or instructions are used to implement the method described in any one of claims 1 to 12, or to implement the methods described in claims 13 to 22 The method described in any one of the above, or the method described in any one of claims 23 to 34, or the method described in any one of claims 35 to 44.
  92. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求13至22中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求23至34中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求35至44中任一项所述的方法。 A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes a computer program, which when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, Or perform the method as described in any one of claims 13 to 22, or perform the method as described in any one of claims 23 to 34, or perform the method as described in any one of claims 35 to 44 .
PCT/CN2023/105089 2022-07-14 2023-06-30 Carrier switching method and apparatus WO2024012281A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210832744.4 2022-07-14
CN202210832744.4A CN117460063A (en) 2022-07-14 2022-07-14 Carrier switching method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024012281A1 true WO2024012281A1 (en) 2024-01-18

Family

ID=89535503

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/105089 WO2024012281A1 (en) 2022-07-14 2023-06-30 Carrier switching method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117460063A (en)
WO (1) WO2024012281A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120099537A1 (en) * 2010-10-21 2012-04-26 Motorola, Inc. Method for signaling a mobile wireless device to switch to a preset carrier in a multi-carrier 4g network
CN107624260A (en) * 2016-05-13 2018-01-23 华为技术有限公司 TA acquisition methods and device
CN107846711A (en) * 2016-09-20 2018-03-27 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 A kind of carrier switch method and device
CN109729578A (en) * 2017-10-27 2019-05-07 成都鼎桥通信技术有限公司 The uplink synchronisation method and equipment of asymmetric up-link carrier polymerization
CN110650473A (en) * 2018-06-27 2020-01-03 华为技术有限公司 Capability reporting method and device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120099537A1 (en) * 2010-10-21 2012-04-26 Motorola, Inc. Method for signaling a mobile wireless device to switch to a preset carrier in a multi-carrier 4g network
CN107624260A (en) * 2016-05-13 2018-01-23 华为技术有限公司 TA acquisition methods and device
CN107846711A (en) * 2016-09-20 2018-03-27 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 A kind of carrier switch method and device
CN109729578A (en) * 2017-10-27 2019-05-07 成都鼎桥通信技术有限公司 The uplink synchronisation method and equipment of asymmetric up-link carrier polymerization
CN110650473A (en) * 2018-06-27 2020-01-03 华为技术有限公司 Capability reporting method and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117460063A (en) 2024-01-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3491756B1 (en) Dynamic coverage mode switching and communication bandwidth adjustment
CN109661840B (en) Enhanced discontinuous reception management in a wireless communication system
WO2019096202A1 (en) Resource allocation method and device
US11765707B2 (en) Selective multi-link operation in a wireless local area network
CN111955046A (en) Listen before talk procedure with increased awareness of priority and interference
US20200252949A1 (en) Dynamic Bandwidth Adaptation with Network Scheduling
WO2020258157A1 (en) Resource set monitoring method, device and storage medium
WO2020030047A1 (en) Communication method and related device
US20220030565A1 (en) Method and device for adjusting pdcch monitoring period
CN111148196A (en) Power consumption reduction by pre-obtaining time domain resource allocation patterns via additional signaling
CN110972305A (en) Broadband transmission of new radio unlicensed spectrum (NRU) with narrowband monitoring
WO2023030514A1 (en) Wireless communication method and communication apparatus
CN113261385B (en) Flexible downlink control signal monitoring in wireless communications
JP7429242B2 (en) Measurement management method and device, communication device
US20220182940A1 (en) Discontinuous reception processing method, and terminal device
WO2021196100A1 (en) Cell handover method, electronic device and storage medium
WO2024012281A1 (en) Carrier switching method and apparatus
WO2022194071A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024012276A1 (en) Carrier switching method and apparatus
WO2022188638A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2022028558A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus and system
WO2020154871A1 (en) Measurement control method, terminal device, and network device
JP2021519550A (en) Wireless devices, network nodes, and methods in these for transmitting synchronization signals
WO2024067707A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023093827A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23838773

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1